Home

Manuals - Elgiganten Företag Online

1. 6 Gently pull the paper out of the paper path 238 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW Te 8 AREA 5 Clear jams in Tray 2 and the internal paper path d ENWW Close the transfer access panel ili z t o n ies Pr mE s e g Open the right door E Jams 239 2 Lift the green handle on the transfer access panel and open the panel QURLIE i 8 i 4 ail h a aw M COSI 3
2. 240 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW 5 Open Tray 2 and make sure that the paper is stacked correctly 6 7 Remove any paper from the feeder rollers inside the product 8 Reinsert Tray 2 by aligning the side rollers and pushing it back into the product ENWW Jams 241 9 Close the tray dee cd AREA 6 Clear jams in Tray 1 amp NOTE Evenifjammed paperis visible in Tray 1 clear the jam from the inside of the product by opening the right door 242 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW 1 Open the right door amp NOTE When clearing jams of long paper 11 x 17 12 x 18 and A3 it may be necessary to cut or tear the jammed paper before opening the right door ENWW Jams 243 3 If paper has entered the internal paper path lift the green handle on the transfer access panel and open the panel
3. 1 USB 2 0 port 84 Chapter 5 Connect the product ENWW Network connection All product models include an embedded HP Jetdirect print server which supports connection to a network using the local area network LAN connector RJ 45 on the back of the product For more information about configuring the product on a network see Network configuration on page 87 Figure 5 2 Network connection 1 Network cable 2 Network port ENWW Network connection 85 86 Chapter 5 Connect the product ENWW ENWW Network configuration e Benefits of a network connection e Supported network protocols e Configuring network settings e Network utilities 87 Benefits of a network connection Connecting the product to a network provides a number of benefits e A All network users can share the same product e You can manage the product remotely from any computer on the network by using the embedded Web server EWS e You can use the HP Easy Printer Care software to view supply usage on all HP products connected to the network This makes it easy to centrally manage ordering replacement cartridges and other supplies e Forlarge enterprise businesses you can also manage the product remotely by using HP Web Jetadmin 88 Chapter 6 Network configuration ENWW Supported network pr
4. ENWW Replace supplies 201 3 Locate the black formatter pressure release tabs on the formatter board in the rear of the product 5 Gently pull on the black tabs to pull the formatter board from the product Place the formatter board on a clean flat grounded surface 202 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW 6 To replace a DIMM that is currently installed spread the latches apart on each side of the DIMM slot lift the DIMM up at an angle and pull it out 7 Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package Locate the alignment notch on the bottom edge of the DIMM pe 8 Holding the DIMM by the edges align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated When installed correctly the metal contacts are not visible amp NOTE If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM make sure the notch on the bottom of the DIMM is aligned with the bar in the slot If the DIMM still does not go in make sure you are using the correct type of DIMM ENWW Replace supplies 203 10 Align the formatter board in the tracks at the bottom of the slot and then slide the board back into
5. 1 Output bins 118 Chapter 7 Paper and print media ENWW 2 Front door 3 Stapler unit 4 Top cover 5 Connection cable Figure 7 2 Booklet maker finisher accessory S Hd WXCOCOEOOER das is A N KS 1 Booklet bin guide 2 Booklet output bin 3 Stacking output bins 4 Front door 5 Stapler units 6 Top cover 7 Connection cable Use the booklet making feature You can create booklets from the print driver or by copying an original document Before creating a booklet set the booklet bin guide for the size of paper being used e Closed 11x17 Legal A3 or B4 e Open Letter Rotated A4 Rotated ENWW Choose an output location 119 doo 8 S CSS och Create a booklet from the print driver 1 On the File menu of your software program click Print 2 Select HP Color LaserJet CM6030 or CM6040 MFP 3 Click Properties and then click Booklet Printing 4 Set the Paper source Paper sizes Paper type Orientation Booklet Layout Print document on andStaple settings and then click OK 5 Click OK to print Create a booklet from a copy Documents can be copied from the automatic document feeder ADF or by placing the document on the scanner glass 1
6. 268 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW 3 Liftthe green handle on the transfer access panel and open the panel ENWW Correct print quality and copy quality problems 269 6 Close the right door peas fees Use manual print modes Try the following manual print modes to see if they solve the image quality problems These options can be found in the Optimize sub menu under the control panel Print Quality menu See Print Quality menu on page 49 Fuser Temp If you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated at the bottom of the page or on the following page you should first make sure the Paper Type and Print Mode settings are correct for the type of paper you are using If you continue to see ghost images on your print jobs set the Fuser Temp feature to one of the Alternate settings Try the Alternate 1 setting first and see if it solves the problem If you continue to see the problem try Alternate 2 and then Alternate 3 With the Alternate 2 and Alternate 3 settings you may see an extra delay betwe
7. 2 Gently pull the jammed paper to remove it 3 Close the top cover of the output accessory bridge 248 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the sorter area 1 Liftthe latch on the top cover of the finishing device and open the top cover amp NOTE Opening the top cover releases pressure on the output bin rollers EN S 2 ENWW Jams 249 3 Close the top cover of the finishing device y SS Fe Clear jams in the booklet maker 1 If the paper is visible in the booklet output bin gently pull the paper to remove it 250 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW 3 Push the upper delivery guide to the right and remove any jammed paper a EET a o se A 5 The positioning knob is the smaller green dial on the right Turn the positioning knob counterclockwise 63693 N mv 6 The jam release knob is the larger green dial on the left Push in the jam release knob and then turn it clockwise to move any jammed paper into the output bin x A
8. sssssssssssssseeeeeeeenennnnnnnnn 258 Product feeds incorrect page size sssssssssssssseenee enne nnns 258 Product pulls from incorrect tray ssssssss enne nnns 258 Paper does not feed automatically esssssssseeeee eene 259 Paper does not feed from Tray 2 3 4 OF 5 sss 259 Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed esessesssssseesseeseeeeeeeeeees 260 Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product ssssss ene 261 Output is curled or wrinkled ssssssssssssesseeeneeeneeem emere n nennen 261 Product will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly sss 262 Understand lights on the formatter sssssssss eene nennen 263 HP Jetdirect C EDS nte e Reed ute ie edad tuf d es 263 Heartbeat LED iere tiet te et o fts te redeat ated 263 Correct print quality and copy quality problems cccccecceecee eee teeeeee eee eee eeeeeaeaeaaecaeeaaeeaeeeeeeees 264 Example print quality problems sssssssssssssssssseneeeenenneenen ennemis 264 Repetitive defects ruler 2 cett eg o aedis aset ege pa ten itane 264 Print quality problems associated with the environment sssss 266 Print quality problems associated with jams sssssee m 266 Optimize and improve image quality ssssssssssssen eene 266 Use supported paper
9. sssssssssssssssseeeeenen nemen 280 Order directly from Ep eoruin ooa tree dote o eterne er duse ou use ko deu espagne 280 Order through service or support providers sss 280 Order directly through the embedded Web server for printers that are connected to a quj ij EET 280 Order directly through the HP Easy Printer Care software sssssssssssssssss 280 Part MUMDOIS IRE LR UR m 281 Pveu Lilejlsw e E 281 Print cari dge Sesvenna 281 mage GUNNS eenn N T a A 281 Maintenance kits on reri rt Reus rnt A ee a ruens ea eder Yd 281 Mes C 282 Cables and interfaces sssssssssssssssssesseene eene rere nn nnne nnne n nennen rete nnis 282 Appendix B Service and support Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement sssssssssssseeee enne 284 Print cartridge limited warranty statement sssssssssseeee eene nnns 286 Color LaserJet Fuser Kit Transfer Kit and Roller Kit Limited Warranty Statement 287 Customer self repair warranty service sssssssssssssseeene eene enne nennen enne 288 Tenues m aa 289 Availability of support and service sssssssssssssssssseeenneenenen enne eren erret 290 HP maintenance agreements EP 291 On site serv
10. C rf ENWW Jams 251 Close the front door of the booklet maker T AREA 9 Clear jams in the ADF Open the ADF cover 1 Remove any jammed media 2 Close the ADF cover 3 ENWW 252 Chapter 15 Solve problems Clear staple jams Clear staple jams in the main stapler The HP 3 bin Stapler Stacker and the HP Booklet maker Finisher Accessory each have a main stapler which is located near the top of the finishing device 1 Open the front door of the finishing device 4 Remove the damaged staples that protrude from the staple cartridge Remove the entire sheet of staples that the damaged staples were attached to ENWW Jams 253 5 Close the lever at the back of the staple cartridge Be sure that it snaps into place 6 Reinsert the staple cartridge into the finishing device and push down on the green handle until it snaps into place Clear staple jams in the booklet maker The booklet maker has an additional saddle stitch stapler that is below the main stapler The saddle stitch stapler has two staple cartridges 1 Open the front door of the booklet maker 254 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW 2 Push the upper delivery guide to the right and remove any jammed paper
11. ice e eie e erede tnn n ua eot nn aha aa en n ka END R RR ai 131 Print a personal job eee 131 Delete a personal Job iioii edet e espe A LER e gebe EAD a ae de iaa 131 Use the QuickCopy feature eei dt eb ee tdt ebrei diner NAA 132 vi ENWW Create a QuickCopy JOD ccs 2 2 rr itecto Entre tete phe eee ne aee neve E A 132 Print additional copies of a QuickCopy job se 132 Delete a QuickCopy JOD ceci e eere Eee sena De cede eden 132 Use the stored job feature for copy jobs ssssssssnm me 133 Create a stored COpy JOD etti e e eie e Ree Brea ERR 133 Print a stored Job i e ith Aedes ape ees 133 Delete a stored job sssssssssssesssse eene 133 Print photos or marketing material eee eseeee EEEE 135 Supported glossy pape 5 tee e een rore a eia hdve ders he p a t de di MR cda die un 135 Configure the paper tray 3 ante e oe e de n Eie cr p MR de Eo 135 Configure the driver settings eccentric ennt ned nnn d 136 Print weatherproof maps and outdoor signs sssssssssssssseeeeen emen 137 Supported tough paper ssssssssssssssssee eene merenti nnn nennen 137 Configure the paper tray ncc terree eade e E ve e Ede cu a due doe Pddd 137 Configure the driver settings sssssssesseeeenee ener nennen 137 Set the duplex alignment esner aa TEEDE REEERE 138 9 Print tasks Cancela print Job
12. Default IP Specify the IP address to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced TCP IP reconfiguration for example when manually configured to use BootP or DHCP Auto IP A link local IP address 169 254 x x is set ENWW Initial Setup menu 31 Table 2 11 Jetdirect menus continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values and Description Legacy The address 192 0 0 192 is set consistent with older HP Jetdirect devices DHCP Release This menu appears if Config Method was set to DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists No default The current DHCP lease is saved Yes The current DHCP lease and the leased IP address are released DHCP Renew This menu appears if Config Method was set to DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists No default The print server does not request to renew the DHCP lease Yes The print server requests to renew the current DHCP lease Primary DNS Specify the IP address n n n n of a Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Specify the IP address n n n n of a Secondary Domain Name System DNS Server IPV6 Settings Enable Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the print server Off IPv6 is disabled On default IPv6 is enabled Address Manual Settings Use this item to manually set IPv6 addresses on the print server Enable Select this item and choose On to enab
13. sssssssssssssssssssneeeeretrenn nnne nennen nnne nne 266 Calibratethe product s tne d e dei rea aiaa ee aaa 266 Specify the correct paper type sssssssssssssssssssssssseseeere nere 267 Clean the fuser iere tete ee ne eet ia eso doe tu E e ae 267 Respond to control panel error messages ccccceeececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 267 Clean the registration second transfer assembly 268 Use manual print modes ccc cc cce eee e cece eee ee eee ee eee a eeaeaaaeaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteness 270 Print quality troubleshooting pages sss 271 Performance problems r aar r aa e raa rennen nnn nennen nennen aa eaaa EEEE EA sensn nennen 272 Solve fax problems AEAEE oo te E E is tete 273 Solve e mail problems ote ER UR OE OD EEG Festa aa PORE s 273 Validate the SMTP gateway address sss emen ene nnnns 273 Validate the LDAP gateway address ssssssesssee emnes 273 Solve network connectivity problems ssssssesssssseeeeene eene nennen enne nnne enne 274 Solve network printing problems esses eene nennen 274 Verify communication over the network esssssseeenm emm menn 275 xi Solve common Macintosh problems cccecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecceesaeeaaaeaaaaaeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeentess 276 Appendix A Supplies and accessories Order parts accessories and supplies
14. 4 Gently pull the paper out of the paper path S d 244 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW 6 Close the right door AREA 7 Clear jams in optional Trays 3 4 and 5 1 Open the right door ENWW Jams 245 3 Close the right door 246 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW 6 Open the tray that is indicated in the control panel message and make sure that the paper is stacked correctly T 8 ENWW Jams 247 AREA 8 Clear jams in the optional finishing devices Clear jams in the output accessory bridge 1 Lift the latch on the top cover of the output accessory bridge and open the top cover
15. Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm w 4 49 x 6 38 in Envelope 98 42 x 190 5 mm v Monarch 3 88 x 7 5 in Double Post 148 x 200 mm w Card 5 83 x 7 87 in 4 x 6 Index 102x152mm 4x6in w Card 5 x 8 Index 127x203 mm 5x8in w Card Custom Size 98 55 x 139 70 mm to 320 x 457 2 mm 3 9 x 5 5 to 12 6 x 18 in 1 Booklet maker only Stacking uses bins 1 2 and 3 in the stapler stacker or bins 1 and 2 in the booklet maker ENWW Supported paper and print media sizes 99 Supported paper types Table 7 4 Tray 1 paper information Type Specifications Quantity Driver settings Paper orientation Plain or unspecified Load preprinted or prepunched paper facing down with the top edge leading into the tray or toward the Paper and cardstock standard sizes Range Maximum stack height 10 mm 0 6 in 60 g m 16 Ib bond to 220 g m 581b bond Equivalent to 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond back of the product Envelopes Less than 60 g m 16 Up to 10 envelopes Envelope Short edge leading Ib bond to 90 g m 24 flap toward the front of Ib bond the product facing up Labels Maximum 0 23 mm Maximum stack height Labels Side to be printed on 0 009 in thick 10 mm 0 6 in facing down Transparencies Minimum 0 13 mm Maximum stack height Transparencies Side to be printed on 0 005 in thick 10 mm 0 6 in facing down Heavy 0 13 mm 0 005 in Maximum stack height Light glossy glossy or Side to be prin
16. e Personal jobs When you send a private job to the device the job does not print until you provide the required personal identification number PIN at the control panel e QuickCopy jobs You can print the requested number of copies of a job and then store a copy of the job on the device hard disk Storing the job allows you to print additional copies of the job later e Stored jobs You can store a job such as a personnel form time sheet or calendar on the device and allow other users to print the job at any time Stored jobs also can be protected by a PIN Follow the instructions in this section to gain access to the job storage features at the computer See the specific section for the type of job that you want to create A CAUTION Ifyou turn off the device all QuickCopy proof and hold and personal jobs are deleted Gain access to the job storage features For Windows 1 On the File menu click Print 2 Click Properties and then click the Job Storage tab 3 Select the job storage mode that you want For Macintosh In newer drivers Select Job Storage in the pull down menu in the Print dialog box In older drivers select Printer Specific Options Use the proof and hold feature The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a job and then to print the additional copies To permanently store the job and prevent the device from deleting it when space is needed for something
17. e X Automatic document feeder ADF that holds up to 50 pages e HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10 100Base TX network e 512 megabytes MB of random access memory RAM e Duplexer e Hard drive e A Analog fax HP Color LaserJet CM6030 MFP e 100 sheet multipurpose input tray Tray 1 e 30ppm e Two 500 sheet input trays e X Automatic document feeder ADF that holds up to 50 pages e HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10 100Base TX network e 512 megabytes MB of random access memory RAM e Duplexer e Hard drive HP Color LaserJet CM6030f MFP e 100 sheet multipurpose input tray Tray 1 e 30ppm e Four 500 sheet input trays 2 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW ENWW Table 1 1 Product models continued Model Features e A Automatic document feeder ADF that holds up to 50 pages e HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10 100Base TX network e 512 megabytes MB of random access memory RAM e Duplexer e Hard drive e X Analog fax Product comparison 3 Product features Table 1 2 Features Speed and throughput e Print up to 40 ppm HP Color LaserJet CM6040 or 30 ppm HP Color LaserJet CM6030 on letter size paper Less than 11 seconds to print the first page Recommended maximum monthly print volume of 15 000 pages HP Color LaserJet CM6040 or 10 000 pages HP Color LaserJet CM6030 An 835 megahertz MHz
18. marne eee i een e ep dee ra oce Nee aes 140 Stop the current print job from the control panel sssssssssseseeeeeeee 140 Stop the current print job from the software program sssssssssssseeeeeeereee 140 Use features in the Windows printer driver sssssssssssseneeeeeeenn enne 141 Open the printer driver ssssssssssseeeneeeeeeeee ne nennen nennen nennen nnne nens 141 Use printing Shortcuts cce iere tete N echa pae Coa SR die eb ep aed E Rude 141 Set paper and quality options sssssssssssssssseseeeeenee eene 141 Set document effects ssssssssssssssssssseesseeeeeee eren emere n nennen nnns nens 142 Set document finishing options sssssssssssssssssesseeeee eene 142 oet product output optlO ls 3 neoninis ex n tlie ene e ea cad a ERA uA aa 142 Set job storage options ssssssssssssssssssseee nennen nennen nennen rennes 142 Set Color OPUOMS E URS 143 Obtain support and product status information ssssssssseeseeeennes 143 Set advanced printing options ssssssssssssssssenne eene 144 10 Use color Manage CONOR ss e e 146 Automatic or manual color adjustment sssssssse enne 146 Manual color options ee meer emere nnne 146 Print i grayscale aciei iate eee cerei E E E Ha RR Eee ade 147 Restrict eI iddcansand dandangaaddaaganssndcdadaandaiediaanaxac
19. ENWW V Load large size paper into Tray 3 4 or 5 sssesssssssssssssssss 108 Load letterhead pre printed or pre punched paper ssssssssssseeeeeee 108 Change the Image Rotation setting ssesm 109 Choose the correct orientation for loading letterhead pre printed or pre p nched paper esent Ee eee aa ead ee a da M Ente eee e Rasun eese Re eaS 109 eremi Em 114 Configure a tray when loading paper ssssssssseee emm emnes 114 Configure a tray to match print job settings sssssem 114 Automatic media type sensing auto sense mode sssssssseeene 114 Auto sense settings t Rr ra eoe o aee Exe e RR De SERERE Radices 115 Select the paper by source type or size sssssssssssseneeemeenennns 115 Sl 115 Type and ZE D 116 Choose arn output loCatlOn tete ttt ett he aede e a Page d e Ed On ue caue 117 Standard output bins sse rennen nnne nnns nenne nnn rennes 117 Optional output accessories sssssssssssssseeseeneeneennen nennen AEEA 117 3 bin stapler stacker features sssssssssssssseeeeenenns 118 Booklet maker finisher features ssssssssssssssseeeernne 118 Accessory walkaround sssssssesesseeeeeeneen eene nennen enne 118 Use the booklet making feature sssssssseeeeeennnn emeret 119 Create a booklet fro
20. Use the address book Change e mail settings for the current job Scan to a folder Scan to a workflow destination 163 Configure e mail settings The product offers color scanning and digital sending capabilities By using the control panel you can scan black and white or color documents and send them to an e mail address as an e mail attachment To use digital sending the product must be connected to a local area network LAN 929 NOTE The e mail icon is not shown on the control panel if e mail is not configured Before you can send a document to e mail you must configure the product E NOTE The instructions that follow are for configuring the product at the control panel You can also perform these procedures by using the embedded Web server For more information see Embedded Web server on page 183 Supported protocols The HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP models support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP and Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP SMTP e SMTP is a set of rules that define the interaction between programs that send and receive e mail In order for the device to send documents to e mail it must be connected to a LAN that has access to an e mail server that supports SMTP The SMTP server must also have Internet access e Ifyou are using a LAN connection contact your system administrator to obtain the IP address or host name for your SMTP serve
21. 4 Grasp the handle of the blue staple cartridge unit and pull it toward you then swing the staple cartridge unit into an upright position ENWW Jams 255 5 Check each staple cartridge for jammed staples a On each staple cartridge press down on the green plastic tabs while lifting the jam clearance plate A WARNING Do not place your fingers or hands underneath the staple cartridge during this procedure b Remove any jammed staples Remove any damaged staples and the entire sheet of staples that the damaged staples were attached to c Press down on the jam clearance plate to close it A WARNING Do not place your fingers or hands underneath the staple cartridge during this procedure 6 Pullthe staple cartridge unit forward and swing it downward to the original position Push in on the handle to lock it into position 256 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW 7 Push the staple carriage back into the booklet maker oye Jam recovery This product provides jam recovery a feature that reprints jammed pages The following options are available e Auto The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available e Off The product does not attempt to reprint jammed pages Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages performance is optimal amp
22. NOTE When using this option if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on both sides some pages can be lost e On The product always reprints jammed pages Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed This might cause overall performance to suffer Set the jam recovery feature 1 Touch Administration and then touch Device Behavior 2 Touch Warning Error Behavior and then touch Jam Recovery 3 Touch an option and then touch Save ENWW Jams 257 Paper handling problems Use only paper that meets the specifications outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide This guide is available at www hp com support ljpaperguide Product feeds multiple sheets Product feeds multiple sheets Cause Solution The input tray is overfilled Open the tray and verify that the Remove excess paper from the input tray paper stack is below the maximum stack height mark Print paper is sticking together Remove paper flex it rotate it 180 degrees or flip it over and then reload it into the tray NOTE Donotfan paper Fanning can cause static electricity which can cause paper to stick together Paper does not meet the specifications for this product Use only paper that meets HP paper specifications for this product Trays are not properly adjusted Make sure that the paper guides match the size of paper being used Product feeds incorrect page size
23. OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you 284 Appendix B Service and support ENWW THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU ENWW Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement 285 Print cartridge limited warranty statement This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship This warranty does not apply to products that a have been refilled refurbished remanufactured or tampered with in any way b experience problems resulting from misuse improper storage or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or c exhibit wear from ordinary use To obtain warranty service please return the product to place of purchase with a written description of the problem and print samples or contact HP customer support At HP s option HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY D
24. Product feeds incorrect page size Cause Solution The correct size paper is not loaded in the input tray Load the correct size paper in the input tray The correct size paper is not selected in the software program Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer or printer driver driver are appropriate since the software program settings override the printer driver and control panel settings and the printer driver settings override the control panel settings For more information see Change printer driver settings for Windows on page 67 or Change printer driver settings for Macintosh on page 74 The correct size paper for the tray is not selected in the product From the control panel select the correct size paper for the control panel tray The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured The guides in the tray are not against the paper Verify that the paper guides are touching the paper Product pulls from incorrect tray Product pulls from incorrect tray Cause Solution You are using a driver for a different product Use a driver for this product The specified tray is empty Load paper in the specified tray 258 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW Product pulls from incorrect tray Cause Solution The paper size is not configu
25. The terminal window opens Type ping followed by the IP address For example type ping XXX XXX XXX XXX where XXX XXX XXX XXX is the IPv4 address that is shown on the HP Jetdirect configuration page If the product is communicating over the network the response is a list of replies from the product Verify that the IP address is not a duplicate address on the network by using the address resolution protocol arp a command At the prompt type arp a Find the IP address in the list and compare its physical address to the hardware address that is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page in the section called HP Jetdirect Configuration If the addresses match all network communications are valid If you cannot verify that the product is communicating over the network contact the network administrator Solve network connectivity problems 275 Solve common Macintosh problems This section lists problems that can occur when using Mac OS X Table 15 1 Problems with Mac OS X The printer driver is not listed in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility Cause Solution The product software might not have been installed or was installed incorrectly Make sure that the product PPD is in the following hard drive folder Library Printers PPDs Contents Resources lang lproj Where lang is the two letter language code for the language that you are using If necessary reinstall the software See the get
26. default Alternate If you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated at the bottom of the page or on the following page you should first make sure the Paper Type and Print Mode settings are correct for the type of paper you are using If you continue to see ghost images on your print jobs set the Fuser Temp feature to one of the Alternate settings Try the Alternate 1 setting first and see if it solves the problem If you continue to see the problem try Alternate 2 and then Alternate 3 With the Alternate 2 and Alternate 3 settings you may see an extra delay between jobs If you are seeing marks on the back side of the paper when printing from Tray 1 set the mode to Alternate This increases the frequency of the cleaning cycle Gloss Mode Normal default High Chosen when stable high gloss is required Set this feature to High for glossy print jobs such as photos if you notice the gloss finish decreasing after the first page is printed This setting reduces the performance for all paper types 50 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Table 2 16 Print Quality menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Values Description Light Media Auto default Prevents the fuser from wrapping with light paper Set this feature to On if you are frequently seeing Fuser On Delay Jam or Fuser Wrap Jam messages especially when printing on lightweight paper or on jobs with heavy toner coverage Environ
27. gently pull the paper to remove it 4 Close the right door ENWW Jams 231 AREA 2 Clear jams in the fuser A WARNING The fuser can be hot while the product is in use Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it 1 Open the right door 232 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW 4 Close the transfer access panel M ETT TEE E ico dd q j A r i ON 5 Open the fuser jam access door above the fuser and remove any paper that is visible Then close the fuser jam access door 6 Paper could also be jammed inside the fuser where it would not be visible Remove the fuser
28. instructions on the pages that print out Correct print quality and copy quality problems 271 Performance problems Problem Cause Solution Pages print but are totally blank The sealing tape might still be in the print Verify that the sealing tape has been cartridges completely removed from the print cartridges The document might contain blank pages Check the document that you are printing to see if content appears on all of the pages The product might be malfunctioning To check the product print a Configuration page Pages print very slowly Heavier media types can slow the print job Print on a different type of media Complex pages can print slowly Proper fusing may require a slower print speed to ensure the best print quality The RLT photo fix options under HP real life technologies on the Paper Quality tab of the print driver can cause De select these options to improve print speed slow printing Pages did not print The product might not be pulling media Make sure paper is loaded in the tray correctly correctly If the problem persists you might need to replace the pickup rollers and the separation pad See Customer support on page 289 The media is jamming in the device Clear the jam See Jams on page 228 The USB cable might be defective or incorrectly connected e Disconnect the USB cable at both ends and reconnect it e Try printing a job that
29. microprocessor Duplex at speed Resolution e 600 dots per inch dpi with Image Resolution Enhancement technology 4800 for optimum overall imaging 1200 x 600 dpi for detailed line work and small text Memory e 512 MB of random access memory RAM expandable to 768 MB by using 200 pin small outline dual inline memory modules SODIMM that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM Memory Enhancement technology MEt automatically compresses data to use RAM more efficiently User interface e HP Easy Select Control Panel An embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies for network connected products HP Easy Printer Care software a Web based status and troubleshooting tool Internet enabled supply ordering capabilities through HP Easy Printer Care software and embedded Web server Languages and fonts e HP Printer Control Language PCL 6 HP Universal Printer Driver UPD PCL 5 HP UPD postscript PS Printer Management Language 80 scalable TrueType PS typefaces Print cartridges image e drums 4 of each Two part toner imaging system Black print cartridges print up to 19 500 pages at 5 coverage Color print cartridges print up to 21 000 pages at 5 coverage Image drums print up to 35 000 pages at 5 coverage Authentic HP print cartridge detection Automatic toner strip remover 4 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW Table 1 2 Features continued Paper handling e Input E Tray 1
30. or 30 stapled jobs or up to 25 saddle stitched booklets e Ifthe job consists of only one sheet or if it consists of more than 50 sheets the product delivers the job to the bin but does not staple the job e The stapler supports paper only Do not try to staple other types of print media such as envelopes transparencies or labels NOTE For information on loading letterhead pre printed and pre punched paper see Load letterhead pre printed or pre punched paper on page 108 When you want the product to staple or fold a document select the correct option in the software You can usually select the stapler in your program or printer driver although some options might be available only in the printer driver Where and how you make selections depends on your program or printer driver If you cannot select the stapler or booklet maker finisher in the program or printer driver select it at the product control panel The stapler accepts print jobs if it is out of staples but it does not staple the pages The product can be configured to stop printing if the staple cartridge is empty Supported paper sizes for stapling In order to staple a print job you must be a supported paper size and orientation Corner angled staples are supported with the following paper sizes A4 A4 Rotated Letter Letter Rotated Legal A3 11 x 17 and B4 JIS Two staples at the top or side of the print job are supported with the following
31. problems This setting should be left at the default value and only changed when directed by an HP technical support agent Adjustment procedures associated with this setting are beyond the scope of this guide TCF Extend Default default This setting should be left at the default value and only changed when directed by an HP Custom technical support agent Adjustment procedures associated with this setting are beyond the scope of this guide Dialing Mode Tone default Select whether the device should use tone or Pulse pulse dialing Redial On Busy The range is between 0 and 9 The factory default is 3 times Type the number of times the device should attempt to redial if the line is busy Redial On No Answer Never default Once Twice Use this feature to specify the number of times the device should attempt to dial if the recipient fax number does not answer NOTE Twice is available in locations other than the United States and Canada ENWW Initial Setup menu 39 Table 2 12 Fax Setup menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description Redial Interval Detect Dial Tone The range is between 1 and 5 minutes The factory default is 5 minutes Enabled Disabled default Use this feature to specify the number of minutes between dialing attempts if the recipient number is busy or not answering Use this feature to specify whether the device sho
32. the product A CAUTION To prevent damage to the formatter board ensure the formatter board is aligned in the tracks 11 12 To enable the new memory go to Enable memory on page 204 Enable memory If you installed a memory DIMM set the product driver to recognize the newly added memory Enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP 1 On the Start menu point to Settings and click Printers or Printers and Faxes 2 Right click the product and select Properties 3 Onthe Device Settings tab click Printer Memory in the Installable Options section 4 Select the total amount of memory that is now installed 5 Click OK 204 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Install an HP Jetdirect or EIO print server card or EIO hard disk The HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series are equipped with an embedded print server port If desired you can install an additional I O card in the available EIO slot 1 Turn the product off 2 Disconnect all power and interface cables ENWW Replace supplies 205 3 Locate an open EIO slot Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the EIO slot and then remove the cover You will not
33. the type or size for a job does not match the specified tray and the device pulls from the multipurpose tray instead PS Defer Media Enabled default Disabled Select either the PostScript PS or HP paper handling model Use Another Tray Enabled default Disabled Turn on or off the control panel prompt to select another tray when the specified tray is empty Size Type Prompt Display default Do not display Control whether the tray configuration message appears whenever a tray is opened or closed Duplex Blank Pages Auto default Yes Control how the device handles two sided jobs duplexing Image Rotation Multifunc Finisher Operation Mode or MBM 3 Bin Stapler Left to Right Right to Left Alternate Mailbox Stacker Function Separator Image rotation allows users to put paper in the input tray using the same orientation regardless of whether there is a finisher installed NOTE The image rotation set in this menu will be applied any time a job does not request stapling or when the requested stapling could not be applied because of unsupported media or when the stapler is unavailable Select Left to Right to rotate the image as if it were going to be bound on the left This setting is appropriate for print jobs where reading from left to right is the cultural norm This is the default setting Select Right to Left to rotate the image as if it were going to
34. 0 To download HP Easy Printer Care software go to www hp com go easyprintercare This Web site also provides updated information about supported browsers and a list of HP products that support HP Easy Printer Care software For more information about using HP Easy Printer Care software see HP Easy Printer Care on page 180 70 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW Software for other operating systems OS Software UNIX For HP UX and Solaris networks go to www hp com support go jetdirectunix software to install model scripts using the HP Jetdirect printer installer HPPI for UNIX For the latest model scripts go to www hp com go unixmodelscripts Linux For information go to www hp com go linuxprinting ENWW Software for other operating systems 71 72 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW 4 Usethe product with Macintosh e Software for Macintosh e Use features in the Macintosh printer driver ENWW 73 Software for Macintosh Supported operating systems for Macintosh The device supports the following Macintosh operating systems Mac OS X V10 2 8 V10 3 V10 4 V10 5 and later Bf NOTE For Mac OS X V10 4 and later PPC and Intel Core Processor Macs are supported Supported printer drivers for Macintosh The HP installer provides PostScript Printer Description PPD files Printer Dialog Extensions PDEs and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers The PPDs
35. 124 Chapter 8 Use product features ENWW Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour minute and AM PM setting If you want the product to enter sleep mode at the same time each day on the Apply to all days screen touch Yes If you want to set the time for individual days touch No and repeat the procedure for each day Set economy modes from the EWS ENWW 1 2 3 4 5 From a Web browser open the EWS See Embedded Web server on page 183 Click Settings and then Wake Time Set the wake time for each day of the week Set the sleep delay for the product Click Apply Economy settings 125 Use the stapler The automatic stapler is only available with the optional HP 3 bin Stapler Stacker CC517A or HP booklet Maker Finisher Accessory CC5164 Print jobs can be stapled with a diagonal staple in either top corner with two horizontal staples at the top of the page or with two vertical staples at either side of the page e Paper weight can range from 60 to 220 g m 16 to 148 Ibs Heavier paper might have a stapling limit of fewer than 50 sheets e The optional stapler stacker can staple jobs of up to 50 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib paper It can stack up to 1 000 sheets of paper or 30 stapled jobs whichever is less e The optional booklet maker can also staple jobs of up to 50 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib paper It can staple and fold up to 15 pages into a booklet It can stack up to 1 000 sheets of paper
36. 2 2 LP oH eode exta E bu eee bu bee dd ote Fave ceca adus 308 Power cord statement Japan sssssssessssseeeene nennen rne enne 308 EMI statement Korea sse mener nennen nennen nennen nnns 308 EMl statemient TalWan x eictraoqe oett tx puse ae deux ebd wax uh paca dias vane u one sp Maec Ex da MER Mad 309 General telecom statement sss nennen ente nnenenrenees 309 Laser statement for Finland ssssssssssssssese eee nennen enne 309 Substances Table Chitia ida eter ade de eae e i RR eec dean 310 SERE EEREE EE REF ESR ERE PEE EER FEE REDE RR ER ERR BE ERR ERE DELE ER EE XE BUE RR RE REV GE ERR EE ER EL EERR ERR EE a ER FEa PEE Eu RUE RR Ro ERE RR Ee Pa BERE RO Ea ERR E EUER 311 xiii xiv ENWW 1 Product basics e Product comparison e Product features e Quick Reference Job Aids e Product walkaround ENWW Product comparison Table 1 1 Product models Model Features HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP e 100 sheet multipurpose input tray Tray 1 e 40 pages per minute ppm e Two 500 sheet input trays e A Automatic document feeder ADF that holds up to 50 pages e HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10 100Base TX network e 512 megabytes MB of random access memory RAM e Duplexer e Hard drive HP Color LaserJet CM6040f MFP e 100 sheet multipurpose input tray Tray 1 e 40 ppm e Four 500 sheet input trays
37. 2 15 Device Behavior menu Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description Language Select the language Select a different language for control panel from the list messages When you select a new language the keyboard layout might also change Key Press Sound On default Use this feature to specify whether you hear a sound when you touch the screen or press Off buttons on the control panel Inactivity Timeout Type a value Specify the amount of time that elapses between 10 and 300 between any activity on the control panel and seconds The factory the device resetting to the default settings default is 60 seconds Warning Error Clearable Warnings On Set the amount of time that a clearable Behavior warning appears on the control panel Job default Continuable Events Auto continue 10 Configure the device behavior when the seconds default device encounters certain errors Touch OK to continue Jam Recovery Auto default Configure how the device handles pages that are lost during a jam Off On 42 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Table 2 15 Device Behavior menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description Tray Behavior Use Requested Tray Exclusively default First Control how the device handles jobs that have specified a specific input tray Manually Feed Prompt Always default Unless Loaded Specify how a prompt should appear when
38. 500 trays Print on these types of paper only from Tray 1 1 Slide the tray from the product Ef NOTE Do not open the input tray while it is in use Doing so can cause jams in the product 104 Chapter7 Paper and print media ENWW 2 Adjust the paper width guide by squeezing the adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size of the paper being used v 7 Ya it f Vey t tp vu I MEE Via ov LE 7 MEE LE 77 d p yy E Iw 3 Adjust the paper length guide by squeezing the adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size of the paper being used MB cau yy ti ti A A og A P ee iy D ve unt n ty 17 p Z p AE E ENWW Load paper and print media 105 4 Load paper into the tray face up Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack but do not bend it NOTE To prevent jams do not overfill the input tray Be sure the top of the stack is below the tray full indicator Ef NOTE For best performance fill the tray completely without splitting the ream of paper Splitting the ream can cause a multifeed problem The capacity of the paper tray can vary For example if you are using 75 g m 20 Ib paper the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets If the media is heavier the tray will not hold a full ream Do not overfill the tray NOTE Ifthe tray is not adjusted correctly an err
39. 74 Remove software from Macintosh operating systems ssssseene 74 Priority for print settings for Macintosh s emen 74 Change printer driver settings for Macintosh sssssseenm en 74 Software for Macintosh computers ssssssssssssseeeeeee e errem nnne 75 HP Primate UUI E 75 Open the HP Printer Utility ziehe ze nn 75 HP Printer Utility features sssem 76 Supported utilities for Macintosh ssssssssssssssemeerenerenn ennemis 76 Embedded Web server ssssssssssssssssseeeem eene nennen 76 Use features in the Macintosh printer driver ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeceeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeccciaeecaeeeeeeeeeneees 77 ime M 77 Create and use printing presets in Macintosh ce ceseeeeeeceecceeceeeeeeeeeees 77 Resize documents or print on a custom paper size ueeeseeussss 77 Pinta COVER page pee rae eed a stp dc iid do doi o dde d Teka ba deed 77 Use watermlarks eee cene entera nnt nn nn Ro ciaaniacadsdsdenaseeendacecuasnevadsedennacte 78 Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper in Macintosh 78 Print on both sides of the page duplex printing eseesessse 79 Set the stapling options sssssssssssssesseeeee eee 79 ENWW Store JODS ucc sie tr
40. CM6040 MFP 1524 mm 60 in 1079 5 mm 42 5 in 983 mm 38 7 in HP Color LaserJet CM6040f MFP 1524 mm 60 in 1079 5 mm 42 5 in 983 mm 38 7 in 294 Appendix C Product specifications ENWW Electrical specifications A WARNING Power requirements are based on the country region where the product is sold Do not ENWW convert operating voltages This can damage the product and void the product warranty Table C 3 Power requirements HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series Specification 110 volt models 220 volt models Power requirements 100 to 127 volts 10 220 to 240 volts 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 50 60 Hz 2 Hz Rated current 10 5A 5 5A Table C 4 Power consumption HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series average in watts Gi Product model Printing Ready Sleep Off HP Color LaserJet 1265 W 251 7 W 26 3 W 0 72 W CM6030 MFP HP Color LaserJet 1265 W 251 7 W 26 5 W 0 72 W CM6030f MFP HP Color LaserJet 1265 W 251 7 W 26 3 W 0 72 W CM6040 MFP HP Color LaserJet 1265 W 251 7 W 26 5 W 0 72 W CM6040f MFP Values subject to change See www hp com support clicm6030mfp or www hp com support cljcm6040mfp for current information HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series printing and copying speeds are 40 ppm for Letter and A4 sizes Default time from Ready mode to Sleep mode 60 minutes Recovery time from Sleep mode less than 20 seconds Electrical specifications 295 Acoustic
41. CM6040 Series MFP One year limited warranty HP warrants to you the end user customer that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase for the period specified above If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase for the period specified above due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free If HP is unable within a reasonable time to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from a improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration b software interfacing parts or supplies not supplied by HP c unauthorized modification or misu
42. Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean slightly damp lint free cloth Use an ammonia based surface cleaner only when a water dampened cloth does not clean the scanner glass A CAUTION Do not pour or spray liquids directly onto the scanner glass Do not press hard on the glass surface You could break the glass Cleaning the ADF delivery system Clean the ADF only if it is visibly marked or dirty or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality such as streaking 212 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Clean the ADF delivery system 1 Open the scanner lid 2 3 Clean the ADF backing by wiping them with a clean damp lint free cloth Use an ammonia based surface cleaner only when a water dampened cloth does not clean the ADF components 4 Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean slightly damp lint free cloth Use an ammonia based surface cleaner only when a water dampened cloth does not clean the scanner glass 5 Close the scanner lid ENWW Clean the product 213 Clean the ADF rollers You should clean the rollers in the ADF if you are experiencing misfeeds or if your originals show marks as they exit the ADF A CAUTION Clean the rollers only if you experience misfeeds or marks on the originals and you notice dust on the rollers Cleaning the rollers frequently could introduce dust into the device 1 Pull the release lever to op
43. Find Other Printers window Add more products to the My HP Printers list Overview tab Contains basic status information for the device Provides a list of all the HP products that support HP Easy Printer Care software Click the Find Other Printers link in the Devices list to open the Find Other Printers window The Find Other Printers window provides a utility that detects other network printers so that you can add them to the My HP Printers list and then monitor those products from your computer Device Status section This section shows product identification information and the product status It indicates product alert conditions such as an empty print cartridge After you correct a problem with the product click the refresh button in the upper right corner of the window to update the status Supplies Status section Shows detailed supplies status such as the percentage of toner remaining in the print cartridge and the status of the paper that is loaded in each tray Supplies Details link Opens the supplies status page to view more detailed information about product supplies ordering information and recycling information 180 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Options Section Support tab Provides links to support information Device Status section This section shows product identification information and the product status It indicates product alert conditions such as an empty print cart
44. For more information about HP Easy Printer Care software go to www hp com easyprintercare 280 Appendix A Supplies and accessories ENWW Part numbers Ordering information and availability might change during the life of the product Accessories Item Description Part number HP 3 bin Stapler Stacker Accessory 3 bin stapler stacker with output CC517A accessory bridge unit HP 3 bin Stapler Stacker or HP Booklet 5000 staple replacement cartridge C8091A Maker Finisher staple cartridge upper cartridge on HP Booklet Maker Finisher HP Booklet Maker Finisher Accessory Booklet maker finisher with output CC516A accessory bridge unit HP Booklet Maker Finisher saddle stitch 2000 staple replacement cartridge CC383A staple cartridge lower cartridge quantity of 2 HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 Provides fax capability for the product Q3701A This is included with the HP Color LaserJet CM6040f MFP model Print cartridges Item Description Part number HP Color LaserJet black print cartridge 19 500 page black cartridge CB390A HP Color LaserJet cyan print cartridge 21 000 page cyan cartridge CB381A HP Color LaserJet yellow print cartridge 21 000 page yellow cartridge CB382A HP Color LaserJet magenta print 21 000 page magenta cartridge CB383A cartridge Image drums Item Description Part number HP Color LaserJet black image drum 35 000 page black image drum CB384A HP Co
45. HP Web Jetadmin firmware updates 220 HP UX software 71 humidity requirements 297 l I O configuration network configuration 90 settings 31 image drums part numbers 281 replace 198 image fuser kit 110 volt part number 281 image fuser kit 220 volt part number 282 Information menu 18 information pages 178 Information tab embedded Web server 184 314 Index Initial Setup menu 31 installers Windows 94 installing EIO cards 205 interface ports included 5 locating 10 Internet Explorer versions supported embedded Web server 183 Internet fax 176 Internet protocol IP 90 IP address BOOTP 91 changing 92 input 92 Macintosh troubleshooting 276 overview 90 IP addressing 89 IPX SPX setting 33 J jam access lever locating 8 jams clearing 229 common causes of 228 envelopes 261 recovery 257 Japanese VCCI statement 308 Jetadmin firmware updates 220 Jetadmin HP Web 69 187 Jetdirect print server firmware updates 221 installing 205 lights 263 models including 2 settings 31 Job Aids 7 Job Mode copying 161 job storage accessing 129 features 129 Macintosh settings 80 personal 131 proof and hold 129 QuickCopy 132 settings 29 jobs Macintosh settings 76 K keys control panel locating 14 touchscreen 16 Korean EMI statement 308 L LAN fax 176 LAN connector 5 landscape orientation setting Windows 142 languages printer 4 laser safety statements 308 309 LDAP servers connectto 164 embedded W
46. Remove software for Windows 1 Click Start and then click All Programs 2 Click HP and then click HP Color LaserJet CM6030 or HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP 3 Click Uninstall HP Color LaserJet CM6030 or HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP and then follow the onscreen instructions to remove the software 68 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW Supported utilities for Windows HP Web Jetadmin HP Web Jetadmin is a browser based management tool for HP Jetdirect connected printers within your intranet and it should be installed only on the network administrator s computer To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems visit www hp com go webjetadmin When installed on a host server a Windows client can gain access to HP Web Jetadmin by using a supported Web browser such as Microsoft amp Internet Explorer 4 x or Netscape Navigator 4 x or later by navigating to the HP Web Jetadmin host Embedded Web server The device is equipped with an embedded Web server which provides access to information about device and network activities This information appears in a Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer Netscape Navigator Apple Safari or Firefox The embedded Web server resides on the device It is not loaded on a network server The embedded Web server provides an interface to the device that anyone who has a network connected computer and a standard Web browser can use No
47. Self Repair If however you require that HP replace them for you this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product Based on availability and where geography permits CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery Same day or four hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits If assistance is required you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time normally five 5 business days The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement With a customer self repair HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier carrier to be used 288 Appendix B Service and support ENWW Customer support Get telephone support free during your warranty period for Country region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the your country region box with your product or at www hp com support Have the product name serial number date of purchase and problem description ready Get 24 hour Internet
48. THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU Color LaserJet Fuser Kit Transfer Kit and Roller Kit Limited Warranty Statement 287 Customer self repair warranty service HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair CSR parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement If during the diagnosis period HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement There are two categories of CSR parts 1 Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory If you request HP to replace these parts you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service 2 Parts for which customer self repair is optional These parts are also designed for Customer
49. The following procedure changes the default setting to staple all print jobs 1 Open the printer driver See Change printer driver settings for Windows on page 67 2 On the Output tab click the drop down list under Staple and select a staple option Select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs Mac Select the stapler by creating a new preset in the printer driver 1 Open the printer driver See Change printer driver settings for Macintosh on page 74 2 Create the new preset Configure the device to stop or continue when the staple cartridge is empty You can specify whether the product stops printing when the staple cartridge is empty or if it continues printing but does not staple the jobs 1 Touch Administration and then touch Device Behavior 2 Touch MBM 3 Bin Stapler or Multifunc Finisher 3 Touch Staples Out 4 Touch the option that you want to use e Select Stop to stop all printing until the staple cartridge is replaced e Select Continue to continue printing jobs without stapling them 128 Chapter 8 Use product features ENWW Job storage features for print jobs You can save a print job to the product hard disk without printing it You can then print the job at any time at the control panel The following job storage features are available for print jobs e Proof and hold jobs This feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a job and then print the additional copies
50. Warning button control panel touchscreen 16 warranty Customer self repair 288 extended 291 print cartridges 286 product 284 watermarks Windows 142 weatherproof maps printing 137 ENWW Web browser requirements embedded Web server 183 Web Jetadmin firmware updates 220 Web sites customer support 289 fraud reports 193 HP Web Jetadmin downloading 187 Macintosh customer support 289 Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS 305 ordering supplies 280 universal print driver 64 Windows driver settings 67 drivers supported 63 software components 94 supported operating systems 62 universal print driver 64 Windows 2000 fax 176 workflow send to 172 Index 319 320 Index ENWW 2008 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P www hp com Q3938 90967
51. a product function that optimizes print quality If you experience any image quality problems calibrate the product At the control panel 1 Touch Administration 2 Scroll and touch Print Quality 3 Scroll and touch Calibration Cleaning 4 Touch Quick Calibration or Full Calibration 5 Touch Calibrate 266 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW Specify the correct paper type When you send a print job to the product specify the type of paper you are using 1 On the File menu in the software program click Print 2 Select the product and then click Properties or Preferences amp NOTE The steps can vary this procedure is most common 3 Select the Paper Quality tab 4 Inthe Paper Type drop down box select More and then select the paper type that best matches the paper that is loaded in the product Clean the fuser Run the device cleaning page to keep the fuser free of toner and paper particles that can sometimes accumulate Accumulation of toner and particles can cause specks to appear on the front or back side of your print jobs HP recommends that you use the cleaning page when there is a print quality issue A Cleaning message appears on the product control panel display while the cleaning is taking place In order for the cleaning page to work correctly print the page on copier grade paper not bond heavy or rough paper Create and use the cleaning page 1 Scroll to and touch Administration 2 S
52. a value in the I O timeout refers to the elapsed time before a print job range The factory default fails If the stream of data that the device receives for setting is 15 seconds a print job gets interrupted this setting indicates how long the device will wait before it reports that the job has failed Embedded Jetdirect See Table 2 11 Jetdirect menus on page 31 for the list of options Table 2 11 Jetdirect menus Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values and Description TCP IP Enable Off Disable the TCP IP protocol On default Enable the TCP IP protocol Host Name An alphanumeric string up to 32 characters used to identify the device This name is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page The default host name is NPbooxxx where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware MAC address IPVA Settings Config Method Specifies the method that TCP IPv4 parameters will be configured on the HP Jetdirect print server Bootp Use BootP Bootstrap Protocol for automatic configuration from a BootP server DHCP Use DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for automatic configuration from a DHCPv4 server If selected and a DHCP lease exists DHCP Release and DHCP Renew menus are available to set DHCP lease options Auto IP Use automatic link local IPv4 addressing An address in the form 169 254 x x is assigned automatically Manual Use the Manual Settings menu to configure TCP IPv4 parameters
53. all Change the product configuration until the software program is closed print jobs settings 1 OntheFile menu click Print 1 Onthe File menu click Print Mac OS X V10 2 8 2 Change the settings that you want 2 Change the settings that you want 1 Inthe Finder on the Go menu click on the various menus on the various menus Applications 3 Onthe Presets menu click Save 2 Open Utilities and then open Print as and type a name for the preset Center 3 Click on the print queue 74 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh ENWW Change the settings for all print jobs Change the default settings for all Change the product configuration until the software program is closed print jobs settings These settings are saved in the 4 On the Printers menu click Presets menu To use the new settings Configure you must select the saved preset option every time you open a program and print 5 Click the Installable Options menu NOTE Configuration settings might not be available in Classic mode Mac OS X V10 3 or Mac OS X V10 4 1 From the Apple menu click System Preferences and then Print amp Fax 2 Click Printer Setup 3 Click the Installable Options menu Mac OS X V10 5 1 From the Apple menu click System Preferences and then Print amp Fax 2 Click Options amp Supplies 3 Click the Driver menu 4 Selectthe driver from the list and configure the installed options Software for Mac
54. appears on the product control panel that prompts you to print the rest of the copies Temporarily store a private job on the product and print it later a In the Job Storage Mode area click Personal Job b In the Make Job Private area enter a 4 digit personal identification number PIN optional Temporarily store a job on the product In the Job Storage Mode area click Quick Copy One copy ofthe job is printed immediately but you can print more copies NOTE These jobs are deleted if the product is turned off from the product control panel Permanently store a job on the product In the Job Storage Mode area click Stored Job Make a permanently stored job private so that anyone who a In the Job Storage Mode area click Stored Job b In the tries to print it must provide a PIN Make Job Private area click PIN to print and then enter a 4 digit personal identification number PIN Receive notification when someone prints a stored job In the Job Notification Options area click Display Job ID when printing Set the user name for a stored job In the User Name area click User name to use the Windows default user name To provide a different user name click Custom and type the name Specify a name for the stored job a In the Job Name area click Automatic to use the default job name To specify a job name click Custom and type the name b Select an option from the If job name exists drop down list Select Use J
55. be bound on the right This setting is usually appropriate for print jobs where reading from right to left is the cultural norm Select Alternate to use a different loading orientation that might work better with preprinted forms that are used on legacy products This menu appears when the HP 3 bin Stapler Stacker Accessory or the HP Booklet Maker Finisher Accessory is attached Allows you to set the default operation mode Mailbox assigns a user or group of users to each output bin Stacker treats all of the output bins as a single large bin When one bin gets full jobs are automatically routed to the next bin Function Separator specifies a ENWW Device Behavior menu 43 Table 2 15 Device Behavior menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description default bin for specific types of jobs such as faxes or copies stapler stacker only Staples None Sets the default staple selection for One Left Angled One Right Angled documents sent to the device when no staple value is specified Two Left Two Right Two Top Staples Out Stop Sets the default behavior when a job specifies stapling and the stapler is out of Continue staples Stop stops printing if the stapler runs out of staples Continue allows a job to continue printing even when the device is out of staples Offset Off Turns the job offset feature on or off When job offset is on each copy of a job is shifted On to o
56. click the name of each product 4 Locate the drop down boxfor Device Tools in the upper right corner of the window Select Update Printer Firmware from the action list 5 Ifthe name of the RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images box click Browse in the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the RFU file that you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure If the filename is listed select it 6 Click Upload to move the RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server After the upload is complete the browser window refreshes 7 Select the RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop down menu 8 Click Update Firmware HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected RFU file to the product The control panel shows messages that indicate the progress of the upgrade At the end of the upgrade process the control panel shows the Ready message Use MS DOS commands to upgrade the firmware To update the firmware by using a network connection follow these instructions 1 From a command prompt or in an MS DOS window type the following copy B FILENAME COMPUTERNAME gt SHARENAME gt Where FILENAME is the name of the RFU file including the path lt COMPUTERNAME gt is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared and SHARENAME is the product share name For example C gt copy b C N9200 W RFU NNYOUR SERVERVYOUR COMPUTER Ef NOTE Ifthe fil
57. driver and click the Advanced tab How do I Steps to perform Select advanced printing options In any of the sections click a current setting to activate a drop down list so you can change the setting Change the number of copies that are printed Open the Paper Output section and then enter the number of copies to print If you select 2 or more copies you can select NOTE lf the software program that you are using does not the option to collate the pages provide a way to print a particular number of copies you can change the number of copies in the driver Changing this setting affects the number of copies for all print jobs After your job has printed restore this setting to the original value Print colored text as black rather than as shades of gray 8 Open the Document Options section and then open the Printer Features section b In the Print All Text as Black drop down list select Enabled Load letterhead or preprinted paper the same way for every a Open the Document Options section and then open the job whether printing on one or both sides of the page Printer Features section b In the Alternative Letterhead Mode drop down list select On c At the product load the paper the same way you would for printing on both sides Change the order in which pages are printed a Open the Document Options section and then open the Layout Options section b In the Page Order drop down list select Front to Back
58. else select the Stored Job option in the driver Create a proof and hold job A CAUTION Ifthe device needs additional space to store newer proof and hold jobs the device deletes ENWW other stored proof and hold jobs starting with the oldest job To permanently store a job and prevent the device from deleting it when space is needed select the Stored Job option in the driver instead of the Proof and Hold option In the driver select the Proof and Hold option and type a user name and job name The device prints one copy of the job for you to proof Job storage features for print jobs 129 Print the remaining copies of a proof and hold job At the device control panel use the following procedure to print the remaining copies of a job held on the hard disk 1 From the Home screen touch Job Storage Touch the Retrieve tab Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job 2 3 4 Scroll to and touch the job that you want to print 5 Select the number of copies on the numeric keypad 6 Touch Retrieve Stored Job to print the document Delete a proof and hold job When you send a proof and hold job the device automatically deletes your previous proof and hold job 1 From the Home screen touch Job Storage Touch the Retrieve tab Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job 2 3 4 Scroll to and touch the job that you want to delete 5 Touch Delete 6 Touch Yes 130 Cha
59. has printed in the past e Tryusing a different USB cable Other devices are running on your computer The product might not share a USB port If you have an external hard drive or network switchbox that is connected to the same port as the product the other device might be interfering To connect and use the product you must disconnect the other device or you must use two USB ports on the computer 272 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW Solve fax problems For help solving fax problems go to www hp com go mfpfaxaccessory300 You can also refer to the Analog Fax Accessory 300 Fax Guide and the Analog Fax Accessory 300 Send Fax Driver Guide which are included on the product User CD Solve e mail problems If you are unable to send e mails by using the digital send feature you might need to reconfigure the SMTP gateway address or the LDAP gateway address Print a configuration page to find the current SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses See Information pages on page 178 Use the following procedures to check if the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses are valid Validate the SMTP gateway address Ef NOTE This procedure is for Windows operating systems 1 Open an MS DOS command prompt click Start click Run and then type cmd 2 Type telnet followed by the SMTP gateway address and then the number 25 which is the port over which the product is communicating For example type telnet 123 123 123 123 25 whe
60. hold jobs disk based fonts disk based macros forms stored fax files address books and HP and third party applications Ef NOTE Stored jobs will be securely overwritten only when they have been deleted through the Retrieve Job menu on the product after the appropriate erase mode has been set This feature will not impact data that is stored on flash based product non volatile RAM NVRAM that is used to store default settings page counts and similar data This feature does not affect data that is stored on a system RAM disk if one is used This feature does not impact data that is stored on the flash based system boot RAM ENWW Security features 189 Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode does not overwrite previous data on the disk nor does it immediately perform a full disk sanitization Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode changes how the product cleans up temporary data for jobs after the erase mode has been changed Gain access to Secure Disk Erase Use HP Web Jetadmin to gain access to and set the Secure Disk Erase feature Additional Information For additional information about the HP Secure Disk Erase feature see the HP support flyer or go to www hp com go webjetadmin DSS authentication Optional Digital Sending Software DSS for the product is available for purchase separately The software provides an advanced sending program that contains an authentication process This process requires users to type a user id
61. in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers provide access to device features Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the computer Remove software from Macintosh operating systems To remove the software from a Macintosh computer drag the PPD files to the trash can Priority for print settings for Macintosh Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made amp NOTE The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program Page Setup dialog box Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box Settings changed here might override settings changed anywhere else Print dialog box Click Print Print Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box Default printer driver settings The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in all print jobs unless settings are changed in the Page Setup Print or Printer Properties dialog boxes Printer control panel settings Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority than changes made anywhere else Change printer driver settings for Macintosh Change the settings for all print jobs Change the default settings for
62. large list of frequently used e mail addresses on to the product all at once rather than adding them one at a time e Import Export Use this tab to import or export CSV files containing e mail addresses fax numbers or user records so that they can be accessed on this product You can also export e mail fax or user records from the device into a file on your computer You can then use this file as a data backup or you can use it to import the records onto another HP device e Log View the digital sending activity log for the product The log contains digital sending job information including any errors that occur e Preferences Configure digital sending defaults such as the default page size and the default settings reset delay You can also configure these settings by using the product control panel menus Fax tab The Fax tab contains options to configure and use the fax capabilities of the product For additional information about fax functions see the Fax User Guide e Usethe Fax Settings screen to configure the send to fax features for the product e The Fax Address Book page enables you to add fax numbers into the product one at a time and to edit fax numbers that have already been saved in the product You can also use the Import Export feature on the Digital Sending tab to load a large list of frequently used fax numbers on to the device all at once rather than adding them one at a time e Use the Fax Speed Dials sc
63. make copies by using the default copy options use the numeric keypad on the control panel to select the number of copies and press Start To use customized settings touch Copy Specify the settings and then press Start For more information about using customized settings see Adjust the copy settings on page 155 Before starting another copy job retrieve the original document from the document feeder output bin that is under the document feeder input tray and retrieve the copies from the appropriate output bin 154 Chapter11 Copy ENWW Adjust the copy settings ENWW The product offers several features so you can optimize copied output These features are all available on the Copy screen The Copy screen consists of several pages From the first page touch More Options to go to the next page Then touch the up or down arrow buttons to scroll to other pages For details about how to use an option touch the option and then touch the help O button in the upper right corner of the screen The following table provides an overview of the copy options NOTE Depending on how the system administrator has configured the product some of these options might not appear The options in the table are listed in the order in which they can appear Option name Description Sides Reduce Enlarge Use this feature to indicate whether the original document is printed on one or both sides and whether the copies should be
64. multipurpose tray A multipurpose tray for paper transparencies labels envelopes and other paper types See Supported paper types on page 100 for a list of paper types The tray holds up to 100 sheets of paper 50 transparencies or 10 envelopes See Supported paper and print media sizes on page 97 E Tray 2 3 4 and 5 500 sheet trays These trays automatically detect common paper sizes and allow printing on custom size paper Tray 2 supports up to 279 x 432 mm 11 x 17 inches and A3 paper sizes and Trays 3 4 and 5 support sizes up to 305 x 457 mm 12 x 18 inches and SRA3 See Supported paper and print media sizes on page 97 for a list of supported paper sizes For a list of supported paper types see Supported paper types on page 100 o Automatic document feeder ADF Holds up to 50 sheets of paper ADF duplex scanning The ADF has an automatic duplexer for scanning two sided documents Duplex printing Provides automatic two sided printing printing on both sides of the paper The paper size range for automatic duplex printing is 175 mm to 320 mm 6 9 to 12 6 inches x 210 mm to 457 mm 8 3 to 18 inches The media weight range is 60 220 g m 16 58 Ib e Output Standard output bin The standard output bin is located underneath the scanner on the top of the product This bin can hold up to 500 sheets of paper The product provides a sensor that indicates when the bin is full Optional 3 bin staple
65. need these screws and the cover again They can be discarded o e gt 4 5 Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card O Q 206 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW 6 Reconnect the power cable and remaining interface cables and turn the product on 7 Printa configuration page In addition to a product configuration page and a Supplies Status page an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information should also print If it does not print turn the power to the device off and uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure that it is completely seated in the slot 8 Perform one of these steps e Choose the correct port See the computer or operating system documentation for instructions e Reinstall the software choosing the network installation this time Replace the staple cartridge If the optional HP 3 bin Stapler Stacker Accessory or HP Booklet Maker Finisher Accessory runs out of staples while it is stapling a print job the product automatically stops if set to stop when out If the product is set to continue when out the product will continue to print without stapling Ef NOTE Only replace the staple cartridge unit when the stapler stacker or booklet mak
66. p syn laitteen ulkopuolelle Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on m ritetty standardin EN 60825 1 1994 mukaisesti VAROITUS Laitteen k ytt minen muulla kuin k ytt ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle VARNING Om apparaten anv nds p annat s tt n i bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstr lning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 HUOLTO HP LaserJet CM6030 CM6040 CM6030f CM6040f kirjoittimen sis ll ei ole k ytt j n huollettavissa olevia kohteita Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkil T llaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota v riainekasetin vaihtamista paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita k ytt j n k sikirjassa lueteltuja k ytt j n teht v ksi tarkoitettuja yll pitotoimia jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoisty kaluja VARO Mik li kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan olet alttiina n kym tt m llelasers teilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa l katso s teeseen VARNING Om laserprinterns skyddsh lje ppnas d apparaten r i funktion uts ttas anv ndaren f r osynlig laserstr lning Betrakta ej str len Tiedot laitteessa k ytett v n laserdiodin s teilyominaisuuksista Aallonpituus 775 795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser Safety statements 309 Substances Table China AAS DAR ASAE Es LFA Bn al T
67. page 170 Send a document ENWW 1 Place the document face down on the scanner glass or face up in the ADF 2 From the Home screen touch E mail 3 If prompted type your user name and password 4 Complete the From To and Subject fields Scroll down and complete the CC and BCC fields if appropriate Your user name or other default information might appear in the From field If so you might not be able to change it 5 Optional Touch More Options to change the settings for the document that you are sending for example the document s original size If you are sending a two sided document you should select Sides and an option with a two sided original 6 Press Start to begin sending 7 When you are finished remove the original document from the scanner glass or ADF Perform basic e mail functions 167 Use the auto complete function When you type characters into the To CC or From fields on the Send E mail screen the auto complete function is activated As you type the required address or name by using the keyboard screen the device automatically searches the address book list and completes the address or name by using the first match You can then select that name by touching Enter or continue typing the name until auto complete finds the correct entry If you type a character that does not match any entry in the list the auto complete text is removed from the display to indicate that you are typing an a
68. paper sizes A4 Letter A3 11 x 17 and B4 JIS Saddle stitch stapling with the booklet maker can be carried out with these sizes A4 Rotated Letter Rotated Legal A3 11 x 17 and B4 JIS As shown in the graphic below the paper must also be loaded into the paper trays with the correct orientation 126 Chapter 8 Use product features ENWW Pewee ee ee ee M ZLXLL EV If the correct paper size or orientation is not used the print job will print but it will not be stapled dh E NOTE For information about loading and stapling print or copy jobs on letterhead pre printed or pre punched paper see 3 bin stapler stacker features on page 118 ENWW Use the stapler 127 Staple print jobs amp NOTE For staple job capacity see 3 bin stapler stacker features on page 118 Select the stapler at the control panel for printed jobs 1 Touch Administration and then touch Device Behavior 2 Touch MBM 3 Bin Stapler or Multifunc Finisher 3 Touch Staples 4 Touch the option that you want to use One Left Angled One Right Angled Two Left Two Right and Two Top amp NOTE Selecting the stapler at the printer control panel changes the default setting It is possible that all print jobs will be stapled However settings that are changed in the printer driver override settings that are changed at the control panel Select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs Windows NOTE
69. perform Print on both sides Duplex Click Print on both sides If you will bind the document along the top edge click Flip pages up Print a booklet a Click Print on both sides b In the Booklet layout drop down list click Left binding or Right binding The Pages per sheet option automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet Print multiple pages per sheet a Select the number of pages per sheet from the Pages per sheet drop down list b Select the correct options for Print page borders Page order and Orientation Select page orientation a In the Orientation area click Portrait or Landscape b To print the page image upside down click Rotate by 180 degrees Set product output options To perform the following tasks open the printer driver and click the Output tab NOTE The options that are available on this tab depend on the finishing device that you are using How dol Steps to perform Select staple options Select a stapling option from the Staple drop down list Select an output bin Select an output bin from the Bin drop down list Set job storage options To perform the following tasks open the printer driver and click the Job Storage tab 142 Chapter9 Print tasks ENWW How dol Steps to perform Print one copy for proof before printing all the copies In the Job Storage Mode area click Proof and Hold The product prints the first copy only A message
70. printed Tray 1 Image orientation Duplex mode Staple location options Portrait 1 sided One right two right How to load for long edge feed kal 1 How to load for short edge feed rum v4 Letterhead or Pre Landscape 2 sided One right two right printed Tray 1 v 9 emma Qum 3 jelieso dH Letterhead or Pre Portrait 2 sided One right two right printed Trays 2 5 Letterhead or Pre Landscape 1 sided One right two right printed Trays 2 5 o gt 9 2 jeliesp gH T Pre punched Portrait 1 sided or 2 sided One right two right 5 Tray 1 6 o Qum o o o o Pre punched Landscape 1 sided or 2 sided One right two right a Tray 1 em o o o o Pre punched Portrait 1 sided or 2 sided One right two right 5 Trays 2 5 mm o o o o o Pre punched Landscape 1 sided or 2 sided One right two right m Trays 2 5 o z o o o o 112 Chapter 7 Paper and print media ENWW amp NOTE For more information regarding this subject see the Job Aids on the User CD that came with the product or visit www hp com support cljcm6030mfp manuals or www hp com support cljcm6040mfp manuals ENWW Load paper and print media 113 Configure trays The product automatically prompts you to configure a tray for type and size in the following situations e When you load paper in
71. printed on one or both sides Use this feature to reduce or enlarge the copied image on the page Color Black Use this feature to choose black printing or color printing Staple Collate or Collate If the optional HP Stapler Stacker Separator is attached the Staple Collate option is available Use this feature to set up options for stapling and assembling the pages in sets of copies If the optional HP Stapler Stacker Separator is not attached the Collate option is available Use this feature to assemble each set of copied pages in the same order as the original document Paper Selection Use this feature to select the tray that holds the size and type of paper that you want to use Image Adjustment Use this feature to improve the overall quality of the copy For example you can adjust the darkness and sharpness and you can use the Background Cleanup setting to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color Content Orientation Use this feature to specify the way the content of the original page is placed on the page portrait or landscape Output Bin Use this feature to select an output bin for the copies Optimize Text Picture Use this feature to optimize the output for a particular type of content You can optimize the output for text or printed pictures or you can manually adjust the values Pages per Sheet Use this feature to copy multiple pages onto one
72. product will not use another tray Or change the setting from EXCLUSIVELY to FIRST on the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu The product can use other trays if no media is loaded in the specified tray Paper does not feed from Tray 2 3 4 or 5 Paper does not feed from Tray 2 3 4 or 5 Cause Solution The correct size paper is not loaded Load the correct size paper The input tray is empty Load paper in the input tray The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the From the product control panel select the correct paper type product control panel for the input tray Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path Closely inspect the fuser area for jams None of the optional trays appear as input tray options The optional trays only display as available if they are installed Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed Verify that ENWW Paper handling problems 259 Paper does not feed from Tray 2 3 4 or 5 Cause Solution the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional trays An optional tray is incorrectly installed Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is installed If not verify that the tray is correctly attached to the product The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determ
73. prompts you to cancel the job or to resume it Error button The error button appears whenever the device has an error that requires attention before it can continue Touch the error button to see a message that describes the error The message also has instructions for solving the problem Warning button The warning button appears when the device has a problem but can continue functioning Touch the warning button to see a message that describes the problem The message also has instructions for solving the problem Help button Touch the help button to open the built in online Help system For more information see Control panel help system on page 16 Control panel help system The device has a built in Help system that explains how to use each screen To open the Help system touch the Help button in the upper right corner of the screen For some screens the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specific topics You can browse through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu For screens that contain settings for individual jobs the Help opens to a topic that explains the options for that screen If the device alerts you of an error or warning touch the error WE or warning button to open a message that describes the problem The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem 16 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Navigate the Administration menu ENWW From the Home
74. screen touch Administration to open the menu structure You might need to scroll to the bottom of the Home screen to see this feature The Administration menu has several sub menus which are listed on the left side of the screen Touch the name of a menu to expand the structure A plus sign next to a menu name means that it contains sub menus Continue opening the structure until you reach the option that you want to configure To return to the previous level touch Back To exit the Administration menu touch the Home button amp in the upper left corner of the screen The device has built in Help that explains each of the features that are available through the menus Help is available for many menus on the right hand side of the touchscreen Or to open the global Help system touch the Help button in the upper right corner of the screen The tables in the sections that follow indicate the overall structure of each menu under the Administration menu Navigate the Administration menu 17 Information menu Administration Information Use this menu to print information pages and reports that are stored internally on the device Table 2 1 Information menu Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description Configuration Status Administration Menu Print Shows the basic structure of the Pages Map Administration menu and current administration settings Configuration status Print A set of configuration pag
75. set a sleep time for each day of the week for periods when the device Tuesday Custom will not likely be in use for example at a certain time each evening Setting a sleep Wednesday time makes the device automatically go into a low power mode Select a day and then Thursday select Custom to set up a custom sleep time schedule Friday Saturday Sunday FAX Printing Create PIN If you have concerns about the security of private faxes use this feature to store faxes rather than having them automatically print by creating a printing schedule When you select this menu item for the first time you are prompted to set up a PIN Type that PIN every time you use this menu 28 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Management menu Administration Management Use this menu to set up global device management options Ef NOTE Values shown with default are the factory default values Some menu items have no default Table 2 9 Management menu Menu item Sub menu item Values Description Network Address Button Display Use this feature to display the Network Address button on the Home screen Hide default Stored Job Management Quick Copy Job Storage Select the maximum Use this menu to view and manage any jobs that are Limit number of jobs to store stored on the device Quick Copy Job Held Off default Timeout 1 Hour 4 Hours 1 Day 1 Week Sleep mode Disable Use this feature to customize the sleep mode settings for t
76. sets of original documents into one copy job Also use this feature to copy an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at one ENWW time 1 ee n S Touch Copy Scroll to and touch Job Build Touch Job Build On Touch OK If necessary select the desired copy options Touch Start Copy After each page is scanned the control panel prompts you for more pages If the job contains more pages load the next page and then touch Scan The product temporarily saves all the scanned images The product will begin printing copies when it has enough information to begin Touch Finish to finish printing the copies NOTE In Job Build if you scan the first page of a document by using the document feeder then you must scan all of the pages in that document by using the document feeder If you scan the first page of a document by using the scanner glass then you must scan all of the pages in that document by using the scanner glass Combine copy jobs by using Job Build 161 Cancel a copy job 1 Touch the Stop button on the control panel and then touch the job from the list 2 Touch Cancel Job and then touch OK NOTE If you cancel a copy job clear the document from the flatbed scanner or from the automatic document feeder 162 Chapter 11 Copy ENWW 12 Scan and send to e mail ENWW Configure e mail settings Use the Send E mail screen Perform basic e mail functions
77. sheet of paper Original Size Use this feature to describe the page size of the original document Book Copy Use this feature to scan and print pages from a book Booklet Format Use this feature to copy two or more pages onto one sheet of paper so you can fold the sheets in the center to form a booklet Edge To Edge Use this feature to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original document is printed close to the edges Combine this feature with the Reduce Enlarge feature to ensure that the entire page is printed on the copies Job Build Use this feature to combine several sets of original documents into one copy job Also use this feature to copy an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at one time Adjust the copy settings 155 Copy two sided documents Two sided documents can be copied manually or automatically Copying two sided documents manually Copies resulting from this procedure are printed on one side and need to be hand collated 1 Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder input tray with the first page facing up and with the top of the page leading into the document feeder Touch Start Copy The odd numbered pages are copied and printed Remove the stack from the document feeder output tray and reload the stack with the last page facing up and with the top of the page leading into the document feed
78. support www hp com support cljcm6030mfp or www hp com support cljcm6040mfp Get support for products used with a Macintosh computer www hp com go macosx Download software utilities drivers and electronic information www hp com go cljcm6030mfp software or www hp com go cljcm6040mfp software Order supplies and paper www hp com go suresupply Order genuine HP parts or accessories www hp com buy parts Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements www hp com go carepack ENWW Customer support 289 Availability of support and service Around the world HP provides a variety of service and support options for purchase Availability of these programs will vary depending upon your location 290 Appendix B Service and support ENWW HP maintenance agreements HP has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support needs Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty Support services may vary by area Check with your local HP dealer to determine the services available to you On site service agreements To provide you with the level of support best suited to your needs HP has on site service agreements with three response times Priority onsite service This agreement provides 4 hour service response to your site for calls made during normal HP business hours Next day onsite service This agreement provides support by the next working day following a service req
79. text or vector based graphics Using glossy paper in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement e Select AdobeRGB for documents that use the AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB For example some digital cameras capture images in AdobeRBG and documents that are produced with Adobe PhotoShop use the AdobeRGB color space When printing from a professional software program that uses AdobeRGB itis important that you turn off the color management in the software program and allow the product software to manage the color space e Select Custom Profile when you want to increase the color saturation in the midtones Less colorful objects are rendered more colorfully You can download custom profiles from www hp com go cljem6030mfp software or www hp com go cljem6040mfp software 148 Chapter 10 Use color ENWW Match colors The process of matching product output color to your computer screen is quite complex because printers and computer monitors use different methods of producing color Monitors display colors by light pixels using an RGB red green blue color process but printers print colors using a CMYK cyan magenta yellow and black process Several factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on your monitor These factors include e Paper e Printer colorants inks or toners for example e Printing process inkjet press or laser technology for example e Overhead lighting e Persona
80. this device Speed Dial List Print Shows the speed dials that have been set up for this device 18 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Table 2 1 Information menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description Sample Pages Fonts Demonstration Page Print Printout of a page highlighting the print capabilities of the product RGB Samples Print Printout of color samples for different RGB values The samples act as a guide for color matching CMYK Samples Print Printout of color samples for different CMYK values The samples act as a guide for color matching PCL Font List Print A list of printer control language PCL fonts that are currently available on the device PS Font List Print A list of PostScript PS fonts that are currently available on the device ENWW Information menu 19 Default Job Options menu Administration gt Default Job Options Use this menu to define the default job options for each function These are used if the user does not specify other options when creating the job Default Options for Originals Administration gt Default Job Options gt Default Options For Originals Table 2 2 Default Options for Originals menu Menu item Values Description Paper Size Select a paper size from the list Select the paper size that is most often used for copy or scan originals Number of Sides 1 Select whether copy or scan originals are most often sin
81. tray with the specified type and size of paper and then close the tray To specify a custom size Modify 4 When the Tray x Size lt Size gt message appears touch OK to confirm the size 5 When the Tray lt x gt Type lt Type gt message appears touch OK to confirm the type and continue with the job Automatic media type sensing auto sense mode The automatic media type sensor functions only when that tray is configured to Any Type or Plain type Configuring a tray to any other type such as Bond or Glossy deactivates the media sensor in that tray 114 Chapter 7 Paper and print media ENWW The HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series can automatically classify many paper types into one of the following categories e Plain e X Transparency e Glossy e Extra heavy glossy e Glossy film e Heavy For more control a specific type must be selected in the job or configured in a tray Auto sense settings Full sensing default for Tray 1 e The product recognizes light plain heavy glossy and tough paper and overhead transparencies e Each time the product begins a print job it stops the first page to sense the type e Thisis the slowest mode Expanded sensing default for Trays 2 3 4 and 5 e Eachtime the product begins a print job it stops the first page to sense the type e The product assumes that the second and all subsequent pages are of the same media type as the first page e This is the second fast
82. universal 64 Windows opening 141 duplex copying documents 156 duplex printing Windows 142 duplex printing accessory locating 8 specifications physical 293 duplexer Macintosh settings 76 duty cycle 4 E e mail alerts 76 Easy Printer Care 180 economy settings sleep and wake 124 EIO cards installing 205 partnumber 282 electrical specifications 295 embedded Web server assigning a password 188 Digital Sending tab 185 features 183 energy specifications 295 Enhanced I O card part number 282 envelope feeder specifications physical 293 ENWW envelopes jams 261 loading in tray 1 103 environment specifications 297 Environmental Product Stewardship Program 303 EPS files troubleshooting 277 Equitrac devices 188 erasing hard disk 189 Error button control panel touchscreen 16 error messages control panel 227 e mail alerts 76 types of 226 Ethernet cards 5 European Union waste disposal 305 EWS features 183 Explorer versions supported embedded Web server 183 extended warranty 291 e mail about 164 167 address books 168 169 auto complete function 168 configure 164 control panel settings 166 embedded Web server settings 185 job settings 170 LDAP support 164 loading documents 167 problem solving 273 recipient lists 168 scan 164 sending documents 167 SMTP support 164 validating gateway addresses 273 E mail Setup menu 41 F fax accessory analog fax 174 configure features 174 connecting phone line 174 digit
83. which mode is associated with which paper type ENWW Print Quality menu 49 Table 2 16 Print Quality menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Values Description Auto Sense Mode Tray 1 sensing Full Sensing default for Tray 1 Expanded Sensing default for Trays 2 5 Transparency Only When Full Sensing is selected the product recognizes light plain heavy glossy and tough paper and overhead transparencies When Expanded Sensing is selected the device recognizes normal paper overhead transparencies glossy paper and tough paper When Transparency Only is selected the device recognizes only overhead transparency and non overhead transparency types Tray 2 5 Sensing Expanded Sensing Transparency Only default When Expanded Sensing is selected the device recognizes normal paper overhead transparencies glossy paper and tough paper When Transparency Only is selected the device recognizes only overhead transparency and non overhead transparency types Optimize Paper Curl Normal To help reduce paper curl set this option to Reduced This decreases full speed to 10 PPM instead of 40 Reduced ppm and 3 4 speed to 7 5 ppm instead of 30 ppm Pre rotation Off default Turn this feature On if horizontal streaks appear on pages Using this feature increases the warm up time On for the device Fuser Temp Tray 1 Normal default Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Normal
84. 0 mm 1 5 mm 2 0 mm 2 5 mm 3 0 mm 3 5 mm 4 0 mm Fold 11X17 amp A3 4 0 mm Adjusts the fold line for Legal and 11x17 and A3 size paper booklet maker only 3 5 mm 3 0 mm 2 5 mm 2 0 mm 1 5 mm ENWW Device Behavior menu 45 Table 2 15 Device Behavior menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description 1 0 mm 0 5 mm 0 0 mm 0 5 mm 1 0 mm 1 5 mm 2 0 mm 2 5 mm 3 0 mm 3 5 mm 4 0 mm General Copy Behavior Scan Ahead Enabled default Turn on no wait scanning With Scan Ahead enabled the pages in the original document Disabled are scanned to disk and held until the device becomes available Auto Print Interrupt Enabled When this feature is enabled copy jobs can interrupt print jobs that are set to print multiple Disabled default copies The copy job is inserted into the print queue at the end of one copy of the print job After the copy job is complete the device continues printing the remaining copies ofthe print job Copy Interrupt Enabled When this feature is enabled a copy job that is currently printing can be interrupted when Disabled default a new copy job is started You are prompted to confirm that you want to interrupt the current job Alternative Off default This option allows loading of letterhead or Letterhead Mode preprinted paper the same way for all copy On jobs whether copying to one side of the pa
85. 1311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that the product Product Name HP Color LaserJet CM6030f CM6040f MFP series Accessories CB473A 1x500 sheet input tray stand CB474A 3x500 sheet input tray stand CC516A Booklet Maker CC517A 3 Bin Stapler Stacker BOISB 0308 00 Fax Module Regulatory Model Number BOISB 0601 02 Product Options ALL Toner Cartridges Drums CB390A CB381A CB382A CB383A CB384A CB385A CB386A CB387A conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 60950 1 2001 EN60950 1 2001 A11 IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 A2 EN 60825 1 1994 A1 A2 Class 1 Laser LED Product GB4943 2001 EMC CISPR 22 2005 EN 55022 2006 Class A EN 61000 3 2 2000 A2 EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 EN 55024 1998 A1 A2 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Issue 4 GB9254 1998 GB17625 1 2003 Telecom ES 203 021 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 68 Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004 108 EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC and the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Annex II and carries the CE Marking accordingly This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two Conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 1 The product was tested in a
86. 3 Software for Windows ENWW Change printer driver settings for Windows Change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed Change the default settings for all print jobs Change the product configuration settings 1 On the File menu in the software 1 program click Print 2 Select the driver and then click Properties or Preferences The steps can vary this procedure is most common Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 using the default Start menu view Click Start and then click Printers and Faxes Or Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 using the Classic Start menu view Click Start click Settings and then click Printers Or Windows Vista Click Start click Control Panel and then in the category for Hardware and Sound click Printer I Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 using the default Start menu view Click Start and then click Printers and Faxes Or Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 using the Classic Start menu view Click Start click Settings and then click Printers Or Windows Vista Click Start click Control Panel and then in the category for Hardware and Sound click Printer 2 Right click the driver icon and then 2 select Printing Preferences Right click the driver icon and then select Properties 3 Click the Device Settings tab ENWW Change printer driver settings for Windows 67
87. 6 Touch Yes If the file has lock symbol B nextto it the job requires a PIN to delete it See Use the personal job feature on page 131 134 Chapter 8 Use product features ENWW Print photos or marketing material You can use the HP Color LaserJet CM6030 or HP Color LaserJet CM6040 to print high quality color photos marketing and sales material or other color documents on glossy paper To maximize the quality of this output you must do the following Supported glossy paper e Choose the appropriate paper e Configure the paper tray correctly e Choose the correct settings in the print driver HP glossy paper product Product code Product size Control panel and print driver settings HP Color Laser Presentation Q6541A Letter HP soft gloss 120 g Paper Soft Gloss HP Color Laser Professional Q6542A A4 HP soft gloss 120 g Paper Soft Gloss HP Color Laser Brochure Q6611A Q6610A Letter HP glossy 160 g Paper Glossy HP Color Laser Superior Q6616A A4 HP glossy 160 g Paper Glossy HP Color Laser Photo Paper Q6607A Q6608A Letter HP glossy 220 g Glossy HP Color Laser Photo Paper Q6614A A4 HP glossy 220 g Glossy HP Color Laser Photo Paper Q8842A 101 6 x 152 4 mm 4 x 6 in HP glossy 220 g Glossy 4x6 HP Color Laser Photo Paper Q8843A 101 6 x 152 4 mm 4 x 6 in HP glossy 220 g Glossy 10 cm x 15 cm A CAUTION HP Color Laser Presentation Paper Glossy Q2546A is not supported with this p
88. 70 LDAP support 164 loading documents 167 recipient lists 168 sending documents 167 settings 166 SMTP support 164 validating gateway addresses 273 separator page Windows 142 serial number locate 10 service agreements 291 Service menu control panel 60 Services tab Macintosh 80 settings driver presets Macintosh 77 drivers 67 74 priority 66 74 restore factory 225 Settings tab embedded Web server 184 shortcuts 141 Sleep button 14 Sleep mode settings 27 29 sleep settings delay 124 power specifications 295 wake time 124 SMTP servers configuring gateway address 165 connect to 164 testing 165 validating gateway addresses 273 software embedded Web server 69 HP Easy Printer Care 69 180 HP Printer Utility 75 HP Web Jetadmin 69 Macintosh 75 94 settings 66 74 supported operating systems 62 74 uninstalling Macintosh 74 Windows 62 94 Solaris software 71 space requirements 293 special media guidelines 102 special paper guidelines 102 specifications acoustic 296 electrical 295 Index 317 features 4 operating environment 297 physical 293 speed dial list printing 179 speed specifications 4 standard output bin capacity 5 locating 8 selecting 117 staple cartridges empty stop or continue settings 128 staple options Macintosh 79 Windows 142 stapler empty stop or continue settings 128 jams clearing 253 paper sizes supported 126 using 128 stapler options stapler stacker 118 stapler stacker capac
89. 94 Supply replacement guidelines ssssssssssssssenee emen 194 Approximate replacement intervals for supplies esssssssssssssssseeeeee 195 Change print cartridges 0 22 etree terete eee tien eee enne nennen nnn 195 Change image dris tate hasetidens ena ce ee ERREUR EYE HRARO OR e YE LER HER areas 198 ENWW ix Install MEMORY oiii itane se Ord a Eee Metastable ede eee 201 Install DDR memory DIMMS ssm mme enne nnns 201 Enable Memo e 204 Enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP eseese 204 Install an HP Jetdirect or EIO print server card or EIO hard disk 205 Replace the staple cartridge essere 207 Replace saddle stitch staple cartridges in the booklet maker se ceceeeeeeeeeeeees 209 Clean the proquct EE 212 Clean the outside of the product cccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeneesieaeees 212 Clean the touchscreen cccccecceeeeeenecceaeceeeee tense eeseaecaaeaaaeeaeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeesineeeeeeees 212 Clean the scanner glass mentre eet Yu anndth incest ele eee 212 Cleaning the ADF delivery system sssssssssseeeeene mem eenen nne 212 Clean the ADF delivery system sssssss emen 213 Clean the ADF rollers et ette rn tease nen e nn ea acea da aeaa 214 ADF maintenance Kit c cccccccccec cece cece eee ee ee ee aaa aae
90. E This item is available from the Overview and Support tabs Click Alert Settings to open the Alert Settings window in which you can configure alerts for each product Alerting is on or off Activates or deactivates the alerts feature Printer Alerts Select the option to receive alerts for critical errors only or for any error Job Alerts For products that support it you can receive alerts for specific print jobs Color Access Control Use this feature to permit or restrict color printing R w mn HP Easy Printer Care 181 CTGEIU LO m Section Options NOTE This item is available only for HP color products that support Color Access Control NOTE This item is available from the Overview and Support tabs eee 182 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Embedded Web server Use the embedded Web server to view product and network status and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the product control panel The following are examples of what you can do using the embedded Web server NOTE When the printer is directly connected to a computer use the HP Easy Printer Care to view the printer status e X View product status information e Setthe type of media that is loaded in each tray e De
91. ER SO BER T EH AeA HD AIC E E f AME BIRKA ZRA EBER TR Pb Hg Cd Cr VI PBB PBDE HENZE X 0 X X 0 0 SS FLEA AF X 0 0 0 0 0 PEU TE 0 X 0 0 0 0 IB RSE 0 0 0 0 0 0 RES LARA UE X 0 0 0 0 0 Ibo f X 0 0 0 0 0 0 ARCELOR A IAI MEWA SECRET SJ T11363 2006 AY itil BEA X ZR ELAM FAT ASAT A FRH H BD aA eB eB EAM T SJ T11363 2006 AY Rill BEAK TE o LBBS TR Dis HI ABR Te E D IE a Ui EP BE REP BREE P7 i f S ERU 310 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW Index Symbols Numerics 3 bin mailbox capacity 5 selecting 117 specifications physical 293 3 bin stapler stacker features 117 500 sheet trays models including 2 specifications physical 293 A accessories 3 bin stapler stacker 117 booklet maker finisher 117 optional output 117 ordering 280 part numbers 281 accounting hardware 188 acoustic specifications 296 activity log fax 179 address books e mail adding addresses 169 auto complete function 168 clearing 59 deleting addresses 169 importing 185 LDAP support 164 recipient lists 168 recipient lists creating 168 address printer Macintosh troubleshooting 276 ADF capacity 5 clean delivery system 212 maintenance kit 216 make copies from 154 sizes supported 167 ENWW ADF output bin capacity 5 selecting 117 Administ
92. Feeder Kit Yes Notify the device that a new document feeder kit has been No installed ENWW Resets menu 59 Service menu Administration gt Service The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access This menu is intended for use by authorized service personnel 60 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW 3 Software for Windows e Supported operating systems for Windows e Supported printer drivers for Windows e HP Universal Print Driver UPD e Select the correct printer driver for Windows e Priority for print settings e Change printer driver settings for Windows e Remove software for Windows e Supported utilities for Windows e Software for other operating systems ENWW 61 Supported operating systems for Windows The product supports the following Windows operating systems e Windows XP 32 bit and 64 bit e Windows Server 2003 32 bit and 64 bit e Windows 2000 e Windows Vista 32 bit and 64 bit 62 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW Supported printer drivers for Windows e HPPCL6 e HP postscript emulation Universal Print Driver HP UPD PS e HP PCL 5 UPD Universal Print Driver HP UPD PCL 5 The printer drivers include online Help that has instructions for common printing tasks and also describes the buttons checkboxes and drop down lists that are in the printer driver Ef NOTE For more information about the UPD see www hp com go upd ENWW Supported printer drivers f
93. From the control panel touch Copy 2 Scroll to and touch Booklet Format 3 Touch Booklet on 4 For Original Sides touch 1 sided or 2 sided 5 Touch OK and then touch Start 120 Chapter 7 Paper and print media ENWW Configure the accessory operation mode Select the operating mode at the control panel You can set the operating mode for the stapler stacker or the booklet maker at the product control panel 1 At the control panel touch Administration and then touch Device behavior 2 Touch MBM 3 bin stapler or Multifunction finisher 3 Touch Operation mode and then select the operation mode that you want to use e When Mailbox Mode is used each bin is assigned to a user or group of users Every time a user sends a print job the job is routed to the assigned bin e When Stacker Mode is used and the optional 3 bin stapler stacker is installed the three bins act as a single bigger bin When one bin gets full jobs are automatically routed to the next bin When Stacker Mode is used and the booklet maker finisher is installed the two upper bins act as a single bin and the third bin is reserved for booklets e When Function Separator 3 bin stapler stacker only mode is used each bin is assigned to a specific kind of job Usually this designation is bin 1 for copies bin 2 for fax and bin 3 for printing These values can be modified in the Default Job Options menus for copy fax and print amp NOTE Use the product embedded
94. HP Color Laserjet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series User Guide CM6030 MFP CM6030f MFP CM6040 MFP CM6040f MFP HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series User Guide Copyright and License 2008 Copyright Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and Services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein Part number Q3938 90967 Edition 2 06 2009 Trademark Credits Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Corel amp is a trademark or registered trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries PANTONE is Pantone Inc s check standard trademark for color UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group ENERGY S
95. ISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU 286 Appendix B Service and support ENWW Color LaserJet Fuser Kit Transfer Kit and Roller Kit Limited Warranty Statement ENWW This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the printer provides a low life indicator on the control panel This warranty does not apply to products that a have been refurbished remanufactured or tampered with in any way b experience problems resulting from misuse improper storage or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or c exhibit wear from ordinary use To obtain warranty service please return the product to place of purchase with a written description of the problem or contact HP customer support At HP s option HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW
96. If it this feature set to Disabled faxes larger than Letter or A4 will flow across multiple pages Fax Paper Tray Select from the list of trays Select the tray that holds the size and type of paper The default setting is that you want to use for incoming faxes Automatic Output Bin lt Binname gt Select the default output bin if applicable to use for faxes ENWW Default Job Options menu 23 Default E mail Options Administration gt Default Job Options gt Default E mail Options Menu item Values Description Document File Type PDF default Select the file format for the e mail JPEG TIFF M TIFF Output Quality High large file Selecting higher quality for output increases the size of the output file Medium default Low small file Resolution 300 DPI Select the resolution Use a lower setting to create smaller files 200 DPI 150 DPI default 75 DPI Color Black Color scan default Specify whether the e mail will be in black or in color Black white scan TIFF Version TIFF 6 0 default Specify the TIFF version to use when saving scanned files TIFF Post 6 0 24 Chapter2 Control panel Default Send to Folder Options ENWW Administration gt Default Job Options gt Default Send To Folder Options Menu item Values Description Color Black Color scan Black white scan default Specify whether the file will be in black or in color Document File Type PDF defau
97. Issue 4 GB9254 1998 GB17625 1 2003 Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004 108 EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC and carries the CE Marking accordingly This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two Conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems 2 For regulatory purposes this product is assigned a Regulatory model number This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number s Boise Idaho USA February 1 2008 For regulatory topics only European Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger Stra e 140 D 71034 B blingen Germany FAX 49 7031 14 3143 www hp com go certificates USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise Idaho 83707 0015 USA Phone 208 396 6000 ENWW Declaration of Conformity 301 Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC 17050 1 and EN 17050 1 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company DoC BOISB 0601 02 rel 2 0 Manufacturer s Address 1
98. Labels that lie flat Do not print partial sheets of labels Use only full sheets of labels Transparencies Use only transparencies that are Do not use transparent print media approved for use in laser printers Place transparencies on a flat surface after removing them from the product not approved for laser printers Letterhead or preprinted forms Use only letterhead or forms approved for use in laser printers Do not use raised or metallic letterhead Heavy paper Use only heavy paper that is approved for use in laser printers and meets the weight specifications for this product Do not use paper that is heavier than the recommended media specification for this product unless itis HP paper that has been approved for use in this product Glossy or coated paper Use only glossy or coated paper that is approved for use in laser printers Do not use glossy or coated paper designed for use in inkjet products 102 Chapter 7 Paper and print media ENWW Load paper and print media You can load different media in the trays and then request media by type or size by using the control panel Load Tray 1 A CAUTION To avoid jams never add or remove paper from Tray 1 during printing 1 Open Tray 1 J 2 Setthe side guides to the correct width and pull out the tray extensions to support paper 3 Load paper in the tray with the side to be printed on face down and the top of the pa
99. NERA CE saagiaenaeceatangaceens 18 Default Job Options menu sssssssssssssssssseseseenene nennen enne imer e rn nins sn enden entente rrt erre s nennen 20 Default Options for Originals essesi anian T N nenne nennen nnne 20 image adjustment deed ee Mdede fd orte EG Tod Ee pu Medo se pe ce 21 Default Copy Options eee 22 Default Fax Option gegen diego te a E AED AERE EAE ERATUM AD IUE 23 Default E mail Option nci tan unde a dedu bem dd dn xe d td 24 Default Send to Folder Options ssssssssssssssssseeen eene 25 Default Print Optom rerit niter nnne eae eo eed ree vea terea eta eer reda Re 26 Time Scheduling menu eee ere nr ne eee ered nennen eee nennen seni nennn nennen inen 27 Management MOM Rm 29 Initial Setup Menu sisisihan 31 Networking and I O eee er err renee iaaii aianei 31 Fax Setup ier eet e rd red ve Fea eee dot E vasa ee ER ERR e deve HER E Ure TEL ed 38 E mail SOUP ec PL 41 Send Setup MON up 41 ENWW Device Behavior MENU 2 aae nete ccn taeda Dvd Resp MMeedte velud dea dte ME ddre Rin le AcRad DS Rata duc cna e ld er Oda 42 nae L 49 Troubleshooting meri 2 2 ectetur eerta eee a La deest LAT Weta EU ERE R RR VO e SERERE Ye NERRAR EATER RD E 53 ICH RC 59 Sie 60 3 Software for Windows Supported operating syst
100. TAR and the ENERGY STAR logo are U S registered marks of the United States Environmental Protection Agency Table of contents 1 Product basics Product comparison sisia hen dne one ERR ERRANT IN RR RR UR SR ERAN NE baaadcna RENE RAR NI AE E RR 2 Product features dre tod Rade dead eda Nds Ro aed eu aces M vaa aes 4 Quick Reference Job Aids eesesssssssissssssesessenenn nennen nnnm nennen senes is inks sarta r nnne nennen e nennen 7 Product walkarould Enero teste io eire E E CPU ER coed RARE TER REL go ecu SS 8 genau 8 HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 Back ViIQW Gsm 9 Interface ports erre erkennen enki eek em aed Cen x ai i REN Ene ERR 10 Serial number and model number location cece ceccecceccecceceeaeaeseseeeseeececeeeeeesesaeaeaeaeensess 10 2 Control panel Use the controlpanel e M 14 Control panell layo surrainn iN NEREAREN RANTAAN 14 alere iA i 15 Buttons on the touchscreen rien ae ea ua kh FER aE EE AAEE 16 Control panel help system sssssssssssssesessseeee aaa neret nennt nsn enn n nn 16 Navigate the Administration menu sse enne nennen nnne innen nnne nnns 17 atormatlor meri o eee nuni IET HERREN R DECR RRR EXE INR MES KU LER KURVE REC YR
101. Touch Default Job Options and then touch Default Copy Options 3 Several options are available You can configure defaults for all options or for only some options For information about each option see Adjust the copy settings on page 155 The built in Help system also provides an explanation of each option Touch the Help button in the upper right corner of the screen 4 To exit the administration menu touch the Home button in the upper left corner of the screen Copy from the scanner glass Use the scanner glass to make as many as 999 copies of small lightweight media less than 60 g m or 16 Ib or heavy media more than 105 g m or 28 Ib This includes media such as receipts newspaper clippings photographs old documents worn documents and books Place original documents face down on the glass Align the corner of the original with the upper left corner of the glass To make copies by using the default copy options use the numeric keypad on the control panel to select the number of copies and press Start To use customized settings touch Copy Specify the settings and then press Start For more information about using customized settings see Adjust the copy settings on page 155 Copy from the document feeder Use the document feeder to make as many as 999 copies of a document that has up to 50 pages depending on the thickness of the pages Place the document into the document feeder with the pages facing up To
102. WW Supported paper and print media sizes Ef NOTE Toobtain best print results select the appropriate paper size and type in your print driver before ENWW printing Table 7 1 Supported paper and print media sizes Size Dimensions Tray 1 Tray 2 Trays 3 4 5 Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 in w vw wo Letter Rotated 279 x 216 mm 11 x 8 5 in v w vw Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in w vw vw A4 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 69 in w vw wl A4 Rotated 297 x 210 mm 11 69 x 8 27 in w vw vw Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 24 x 10 51 in vc vw vw Statement 139 7 x 215 9 mm 5 5 x 8 5 in v 8 5 x 13 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 in w vw v A3 297 x 420 mm 11 69 x 16 54 in w vw vw A5 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 in w w vw A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 in w 11x17 279 x 432 mm 11 x 17 in d vw vw 12x 18 305 x 457 mm 12 x 18 in w w B4 JIS 257 x 364 mm 10 12 x 14 33 in w vw vw RA3 305 x 430 mm 12 x 16 93 in v v SRA3 320 x 450 mm 12 6 x 17 7 in vc v B5 JIS 182 x 257 mm 7 17 x 10 12 in vc vw vw 8k 270 x 390 mm 10 63 x 15 35 in v v w 16k 195 x 270 mm 7 68 x 10 63 in vw w v Custom 98 55 x 139 70 mm to 320 x 457 2 mm vw 3 9 x 5 5 to 12 6 x 18 in Custom 148 x 210 mm to 297 x 432 mm 5 8 x 8 2 to w 11 7 x 17 in Custom 148 x 210 mm to 320 x 457 2 mm 5 8 x 8 2 to vw 12 6 x 18 in Tray automatically detects paper size Standard sizes within the custom range for Tray 2 a
103. Web server to assign output bins to users or groups of users For more information see Embedded Web server on page 183 Select the operating mode in the printer driver 1 Click the Start button point to Settings and then click Printers for Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes for Windows XP From your Vista computer click Start click Control Panel and then in the category for Hardware and Sound click Printer 2 Right click the HP product icon and then click Properties or Printing Preferences 3 Click the Device Settings tab 4 Perform one of the following actions For automatic configuration under Installable Options click Update Now in the Automatic Configuration list Or For manual configuration under Installable Options select the appropriate operation mode in the Accessory Output Bin list 5 Click Apply to save the settings Select the operating mode in the printer driver Mac OS X 1 Inthe Apple menu click System Preferences 2 Inthe System Preferences box click Print and Fax 3 Click Set Up Printers A Printer List displays ENWW Choose an output location 121 Select the HP product and then click Show Info on the Printers menu Select the Installable Options panel In the Accessory Output Bins list select correct accessory SO Qv GO d In the Mailbox Mode list select the appropriate operational mode and then click Apply Changes 122 Chapter7 Paper and print media ENWW 8 Use pr
104. aaeaeceeeceeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen ren rtrer trs s nns n nennen rrn nnns 216 Calibrate the Scanner isernia deeper ir ear eg e UN E Pk e ener ee aee eH EE re PEE Eod auus 217 Upgrade the firmwares ETT tania heeled 218 Determine the current firmware version ssssssssssssssee eene eren 218 Download new firmware from the HP Web site ssssssen 218 Transfer the new firmware to the product ssssssssssssseseeeeneeeens 218 Use FTP to upload the firmware through a browser eeeeeeees 218 Use FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection 219 Use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware sseeess 220 Use MS DOS commands to upgrade the firmware aeee 220 Use the HP Jetdirect firmware ertt ne edt ane en aida tue n aged ae dea 221 15 Solve problems Solving general problems cett ttai oae Eb cx b Ltd t s ded pac dare dtd added 224 Troubleshooting checklist 0 3 Gir cet eina Fea err iaa Pao e rr EPEE 224 Restore factory settings iiie i oi eh ieee FERE e RE ieee neater 225 Factors that affect product performance sssssssssssssseseseeeen 225 Control panel message types ssssssssssseeeeneeeeneen nennen nennen nennen nne nennen nennen nnns 226 Control paniel messagg6S niic edoceri a eed vice d sec eodd te ex ved Uta e o DID e be vaL Lu vdd ud uis 227 ANUS cete eem t E RE P tU RU e
105. able PC Fax Send PC Fax Send enables users to send Enabled default faxes through the device from their computers if they have the Send Fax driver installed on their PC mm 38 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Table 2 12 Fax Setup menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description Fax Send Settings Fax Dial Volume Off Low default High Use this feature to set the volume ofthe tones that you hear while the device dials the fax number Error Correction Mode Enabled default Disabled When Error Correction Mode is enabled and an error occurs during fax transmission the device sends or receives the error portion again JBIG Compression Enabled default Disabled JBIG compression reduces fax transmission time which can result in lower phone charges However using JBIG compression sometimes causes compatibility problems with older fax machines If this occurs turn off JBIG compression Maximum Baud Rate TCF T 30 Delay Timer Select a value from the list The default is 33 6K Default default Custom Use this feature to set the maximum baud rate for receiving faxes This can be used as a diagnostic tool for troubleshooting fax
106. al document is one sided or two sided Content Orientation Touch this button to select either the portrait or landscape orientation for the original Original Size Touch this button to select the size of the document letter A4 legal or mixed letter legal Optimize Text Touch this button to change the scanning procedure based on the type of document that you are Picture scanning Job Build Touch this button to activate or deactivate the Job Build mode which enables you to scan several small scan jobs and send them as one file Image Adjustment Touch this button to change the darkness and sharpness settings or to clean up background clutter on the original 170 Chapter 12 Scan and send to e mail ENWW Scan to a folder If the system administrator has made the feature available the device can scan a file and send it to a folder on the network Supported operating systems for folder destinations include Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 o E NOTE You might be required to supply a user name and password in order to use this option or to send to certain folders See your system administrator for more information 1 Place the document face down on the scanner glass or face up in the ADF 2 From the Home screen touch Network Folder 3 In the Quick Access Folders list select the folder in which you want to save the document 4 Touch the File Name field to open the keyboard pop up sc
107. al fax 176 printing schedule 28 solve problems 273 Fax Activity Log clearing 59 fax reports printing 18 179 Fax Setup menu 38 faxing analog 174 faxing digital 176 features 2 4 file directory printing 179 File Upload Macintosh 76 Finnish laser safety statement 309 Firmware Update Macintosh 76 firmware upgrading 218 first page use different paper 77 folders sending to 171 fonts EPS files troubleshooting 277 included 4 list printing 19 179 Upload Macintosh 76 Foreign Interface Harness FIH 10 188 formatter cover locating 8 formatter lights 263 fraud hotline 193 FTP sending to 172 fuser clean 267 G gateways configure 164 configuring 165 testing 165 validating addresses 273 glass clean 212 sizes supported 167 graphical display control panel 14 grayscale printing 147 H hard disk erasing 189 Index 313 heartbeat LED 263 held jobs 129 Help button control panel touchscreen 16 help control panel 16 Home button control panel touchscreen 16 Home screen control panel 15 HP Customer Care 289 HP Easy Printer Care description 69 downloading 69 opening 180 options 180 supported browsers 69 supported operating systems 69 using 180 HP fraud hotline 193 HP Jetdirect print server firmware updates 221 installing 205 lights 263 models including 2 settings 31 HP Jetdirect print servers installing 205 HP Printer Utility 75 76 HP Printer Utility Macintosh 75 HP Universal Print Driver 64
108. am that might require the replacement of the fuser Two recommended alternatives are HP Color LaserJet Presentation Paper Soft Gloss Q6541A and HP Color LaserJet Brochure Paper Glossy Q6611A Q6610A NOTE For a complete list of specific HP brand paper that this product supports go to www hp com sbso product supplies Supported paper types 101 Special paper or print media guidelines This product supports printing on special media Use the following guidelines to obtain satisfactory results When using special paper or print media be sure to set the type and size in your print driver to obtain the best print results A CAUTION HP LaserJet printers use fusers to bond dry toner particles to the paper in very precise dots HP laser paper is designed to withstand this extreme heat Using inkjet paper not designed for this technology could damage your printer Media type Do not Envelopes Store envelopes flat Do not use envelopes that are wrinkled nicked stuck together or Use envelopes where the seam otherwise damaged extends all the way to the corner of the envelope Do not use envelopes that have clasps snaps windows or coated Use peel off adhesive strips that linings are approved for use in laser printers Do not use self stick adhesives or other synthetic materials Labels Use only labels that have no Do notuse labels that have wrinkles exposed backing between them or bubbles or are damaged Use
109. arcing in the high voltage power supplies Copies Continuous value Specify the number of copies to print for the from 1 to 30 Color Band test Default 1 Scanner Tests Lower Lamp A service technician can use this menu item to diagnose potential problems with the Sensors device scanner ADF Input Motor ADF Input Reverse Flatbed Motor ADF Read Motor ENWW Troubleshooting menu 57 Table 2 17 Troubleshooting menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description ADF Read Motor Reverse ADF Duplex Solenoid ADF LED Indicator Control Panel LEDs Verify that the components of the control panel are functioning correctly Display Buttons Touchscreen Finisher Tests Manual Sensor Test Component Test 58 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Resets menu Administration Resets Table 2 18 Resets menu Menu item Values Description Clear Local Address Book Clear Use this feature to clear all addresses from the address books that are stored on the device Clear Fax Activity Log Yes Use this feature to clear all events from the Fax Activity Log No default Restore Factory Telecom Setting Restore Use this option to restore the following settings to their factory default settings Transmit Signal Loss V34 Maximum Baud Rate Speaker Mode Restore Factory Settings Restore Use this feature to restore all device settings to their factory defaults Reset Supplies New Document
110. artial product calibrations Full Calibration Calibrate Performs all product calibrations Delay Calibration At No This menu controls the timing of the calibration when Wake Power On the printer wakes up or is turned on Yes default e Select No to have the printer calibrate immediately when it wakes up or is turned on The device will not print any jobs until it finishes calibrating e Select Yes to enable a device that is asleep to accept print jobs before it calibrates The device only accepts new jobs for a short time It may start calibrating before it has printed all the jobs it has received NOTE For the best results allow the device to calibrate before printing Print jobs performed before calibration may not be of the highest quality OoN 52 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Troubleshooting menu Administration gt Troubleshooting amp NOTE Many of the menu items under the Troubleshooting menu are for advanced troubleshooting purposes Table 2 17 Troubleshooting menu Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description Event Log Print This shows the event codes and their corresponding engine cycles on the control panel display Calibrate Scanner Calibrate Use this feature to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system carriage head for ADF and flatbed scans You might need to calibrate the scanner if it is not capturing the correct sections of scanned documents PQ Trou
111. at each contain one byte The IP address has the following format XXX XXX XXX XXX CAUTION When assigning IP addresses always consult the IP address administrator Setting the wrong address can disable other equipment operating on the network or interfere with communications Configure IP parameters TCP IP configuration parameters can be configured manually or they can be automatically downloaded by using DHCP or BOOTP each time the product is turned on 90 Chapter6 Network configuration ENWW When turned on a new product that is unable to retrieve a valid IP address from the network automatically assigns itself a default IP address The IP address for the product is listed on the product Configuration page and the Network report See Information pages on page 178 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP DHCP allows a group of devices to use a set of IP addresses that are maintained by a DHCP server The product sends a request to the server and if an IP address is available the server assigns it to that product BOOTP BOOTP is a bootstrap protocol used to download configuration parameters and host information from a network server The client broadcasts a boot request packet that contains the product hardware address The server answers with a boot reply packet that contains the information that the product needs for configuration Subnets When an IP network address for a particular network class is assigned
112. ation 18 Initial Setup 31 locking 190 Management 29 Resets 59 Send Setup 41 Service 60 Time Scheduling 27 messages e mail alerts 76 types of 226 models 2 monthly duty cycle 4 multiple pages per sheet Windows 142 N n up printing Windows 142 Netscape Navigator versions supported embedded Web server 183 network connection 85 Network Folder scanto 171 Networking tab embedded Web server 186 networks AppleTalk settings 33 configuring 90 configuring gateway addresses 165 connectivity features 5 default gateway 93 device discovery 89 DHCP 91 diagnostics 34 DLC LLC settings 33 gateways 91 HP Web Jetadmin 187 installing EIO cards 205 Internet Protocol IP 90 IP address 89 90 92 IPX SPX settings 33 link speed settings 36 Macintosh settings 76 print servers included 2 protocol configuration page printing 37 protocols supported 89 security 34 SMTP servers 164 subnet mask 92 subnets 91 TCP IP 90 TCP IP parameters 92 TCP IP settings 31 testing SMTP settings 165 Transmission Control Protocol TCP 90 troubleshooting printing 274 validating gateway addresses 273 noise specifications 296 non HP supplies 193 Oo on off switch locating 8 online help control panel 16 online support 289 operating environment specifications 297 operating systems supported 62 74 optional output accessories 117 ordering part numbers for 281 supplies and accessories 280 supplies through embedded Web server 186 orien
113. ations for this product High humidity environments may cause glossy paper not to feed or to feed too many sheets Print glossy paper from Tray 2 3 4 or 5 for best results Avoid printing glossy paper in high humidity conditions When printing glossy paper removing the paper from the wrapper and letting it rest for a few hours can improve feeding into the product However letting paper rest in humid environments may also cause blisters A CAUTION HP Color Laser Presentation Paper Glossy Q2546A is not supported with this product Using this type of paper can cause a fuser jam that might require the replacement of the fuser Two recommended alternatives are HP Color LaserJet Presentation Paper Soft Gloss Q6541A and HP Color LaserJet Brochure Paper Glossy Q6611A Q66104 For a list of supported paper types see Supported paper types on page 100 260 Chapter 15 Solve problems Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product Cause Solution Envelopes are loaded in an unsupported tray Only Tray 1 can Load envelopes into Tray 1 feed envelopes Envelopes are curled or damaged Try using different envelopes Store envelopes in a controlled environment Envelopes are sealing because the moisture content is too Try using different envelopes Store envelopes in a controlled high environment Envelope orientation is incorrect Verify that t
114. bedded Web server Assign a password for access to the embedded Web server so that unauthorized users cannot change the product settings 1 Open the embedded Web server See Embedded Web server on page 183 Click the Settings tab 2 3 On the left side of the window click Security 4 Type the password next to New Password and type it again next to Verify Password 5 Click Apply Make note of the password and store it in a safe place Foreign Interface Harness FIH The Foreign Interface Harness FIH provides a portal on the product By using the FIH and third party equipment you can track information about copies that are made on the product Requirements e Windows 2000 or Windows XP e X Access to third party accounting hardware solutions such as Equitrac or Copitrak devices Use the FIH To use the FIH you must download and install the FIH software The software is available from www hp com go cljcm6030mfp software and www hp com go cljicm6040mfp software The software is used to enable or disable the FIH portal Use the software to set and change the administrator personal identification number PIN Administrators can use the PIN option to configure the FIH to prevent any unauthorized changes Changes can be made only with the correct PIN authentication NOTE ltis important to remember the PIN that is assigned to the FIH administration software The PIN is required to make any changes to the FIH Ena
115. bin at the command prompt Press Enter The message 200 Types set to l Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window Type put and then the file name for example if the file name is CM6040mfp efn type put CM6040mfp efn The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product This can take approximately five minutes Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or computer NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade At the command prompt type bye to exit the ftp command At the command prompt type exit to return to the Windows interface Upgrade the firmware 219 Use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7 0 or later on your computer See Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 187 Complete the following steps to update a single device through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the RFU file from the HP Web site 1 Start HP Web Jetadmin 2 Open the Device Management folder in the drop down list in the Navigation panel Navigate to the Device Lists folder 3 Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices Locate the product in the list of devices and then click to select it If you need to upgrade the firmware for multiple HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series products select all of them by pressing the Ctrl key as you
116. ble the FIH portal 1 Double click the FIH EXE file The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears 2 Click OK 3 Click Enable 4 If you have not entered a PIN before click No If you have entered a PIN before click Yes If you click No type and confirm the PIN and then click OK If you click Yes type the PIN and click OK Ef NOTE The PIN must be numeric 5 Click the appropriate button for the type of connection Direct or Network If Direct is selected type the product port If Network is selected type the IP address and port for the product 188 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW amp NOTE The IP address for the product can be found on the Configuration page If you typed an incorrect IP address you will receive an error message Otherwise the portal is enabled Disable the FIH portal 1 Double click the FIH EXE file The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears 2 Click OK 3 Click Disable 4 Type the PIN and click OK 5 Click the appropriate button for the type of connection Direct or Network If Direct is selected type the product port and click OK If Network is selected type the IP address and port for the product and then click OK The portal is disabled Ef NOTE If you lose the PIN number and the portal needs to be disabled try using the default PIN that is listed to disable it For assistance use the HP Instant Support service which is available through the embe
117. bleshooting Print Print various diagnostic pages that help solve print quality problems Fax T 30 Trace Print T 30 Report Print or configure the fax T 30 trace report T M SO is the standard that specifies When to Print Report Never auto print handshaking protocols and error correction default between fax machines Print after any fax job Print after fax send jobs Print after any fax error Print after send errors only Print after receive errors only Fax Transmit Signal A value between 0 Set loss levels to compensate for phone line Loss and 30 The defaultis signal loss Do not modify this setting unless 0 requested to do so by an HP service representative because it could cause the fax to stop functioning Fax V 34 Normal default Disable V 34 mode if several fax failures have occurred or if phone line conditions require it Off Fax Speaker Mode Normal default A technician can use this feature technician to evaluate and diagnose fax issues by Diagnostic listening to the sounds of fax modulations Diagnostic Page Print Print a diagnostic page that includes color swatches and the EP parameters table Disable Cartridge Use this item to enter a mode where a Check cartridge or color pair of cartridge and drum can be removed to determine which particular ENWW Troubleshooting menu 53 Table 2 17 Troubleshooting menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description color i
118. cartridges Macintosh status 80 management menu 29 non HP 193 ordering through embedded Web server 186 part numbers 281 recycling 303 replacing 195 storage 193 warranty 286 print drivers Windows 141 print features paper quality options 141 print media loading in tray 1 103 supported sizes 97 print on both sides Windows 142 print paper for color printing 151 types 100 print quality menu 49 troubleshooting 264 print server card installing 205 print tasks 139 printer languages 4 printing outdoor signs 137 output bin selecting 117 speed specifications 4 troubleshooting 272 weatherproof maps 137 printing from tray 2 3 or4 104 priority onsite service 291 priority settings 66 74 private jobs cancel 140 Windows 142 problem solving e mail alerts 76 Error button control panel touchscreen 16 e mail 273 jams 228 messages types of 226 networks 34 paper handling 258 processor speed 4 product info 1 product status HP Easy PrinterCare 180 proof and hold Windows 142 proof and hold jobs 129 protocol configuration page printing 37 protocols network 89 PS Emulation drivers 63 Q quality troubleshooting 264 Quick Reference Job Aids 7 Quick Sets 141 R Ready light locating 14 real time clock 191 recipient lists 168 ENWW recycling HP printing supplies returns and environmental program 304 red eye removing 141 regulatory statements Declaration of Conformity 301 302 environmental product stewardship pro
119. cdvlasaantacneeanaale 147 Restrict color printing and copying from the control panel 147 RGB Color Color Themes i esis de Har teal ete E RE REMEE e NEEE 147 Match eei2z D 149 Sample book color matching orreina a T 149 ENWW vii 11 Copy Printing color samples 2 ci cocer Metu e ee Meu cereo Noctu ecu e Nivea A aa RID ae v VIVERRA 149 PANTONE color matching scese i ENA EE nennen nnns 150 Advanced Color USE S m 151 HP ImageREt 4800 eee tr ee eee eee eee ieee einen eren e nennen enne 151 Paper lel EE 151 SRGB o iced diesel tec Medie A eed 151 Print in four colors CMYK sse nennen enne nnns 151 CMYK ink set emulation HP postscript level 3 emulation 151 Use the Copy SChEOM E 154 Set the default copy OPllOMS sssini insania aai e ada aa a iaa a aaa aandaa 154 Copy from the scanner glass ccccceecccceeeseccneceseeececeeesenecaneesesececenessaaaseneeseseaceetensenaseneeeneeceeeeseaases 154 Copy from the document feeder oie eret redit bt ruere RAE T 154 Adjust the copy settings sssssssssssssenne eem enenen nne enr nn nne rnnt nennen nnne 155 Copy two sided doc rmlehts uterine e e E ERE EINER RR RR MEER ae EEEE 156 Copying two sided documents manually sse 156 Copy two sided documents automatically sese 156 Copy mixed size or
120. ceives a call from one of the blocked fax numbers it deletes the incoming fax It also logs the blocked fax in the activity log along with job accounting information 40 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW E mail Setup Administration gt Initial Setup gt E mail Setup Use this menu to enable the e mail feature and to configure basic e mail settings amp NOTE To configure advanced e mail settings use the embedded Web server For more information see Embedded Web server on page 183 Table 2 13 E mail Setup menu Menu item Values Description Address Validation On default This option enables the device to check e mail syntax when you type an e mail address Valid e mail addresses require the sign and Off a iu Find Send Gateways Search the network for SMTP gateways that the device can use to send e mail SMTP Gateway Enter a value Specify the IP address of the SMTP gateway that is used to send e mail from the device Test Send Gateway Test the configured SMTP gateway to see if it is functional Send Setup menu Administration gt Initial Setup gt Send Setup Table 2 14 Send Setup menu Menu item Values Description Fax Number Confirmation Disable default When fax number confirmation is enabled you are prompted to enter the fax number twice to verify that it has been typed correctly Enable ENWW Initial Setup menu 41 Device Behavior menu Administration Device Behavior Table
121. collation is On 1 On the control panel touch Copy 2 Touch Staple Collate or Collate 3 Touch Off 4 Touch OK Change the copy collation setting 159 Copy photos and books Copy a photo NOTE Photos should be copied from the flatbed scanner not from the document feeder 1 Liftthe lid and place the photo on the flatbed scanner with the picture side down and the upper left corner of the photo in the upper left corner of the glass 2 Gently close the lid 3 Touch Copy 4 Touch Optimize Text Picture and select Photograph 5 Touch Start Copy Copy a book 1 Place the book face down on the glass with the top edge toward the rear of the glass Align the book spine with the book icon along the top edge of the glass Touch Copy Scroll to and touch Book Copy Touch Book Copy On and then touch OK Select the number of copies to make and adjust other settings as needed Touch Start Copy or press the Start button on the control panel sU 9n n S o He The following 3 options are available when Start Copy is touched e Copy both pages copies the images on both the left and right side of the spine e Skip left page copies the image on the right side of the spine only e Skip right page copies the image on the left side of the spine only 8 Touch Scan 9 Afterthe last page is scanned touch Finish 160 Chapter 11 Copy ENWW Combine copy jobs by using Job Build Use this feature to combine several
122. croll to and touch Print Quality 3 Touch Calibration cleaning 4 Touch Process cleaning page Respond to control panel error messages If you see a 54 Error XX message in the event log you might need to perform some maintenance on the product in order to avoid more errors and solve print quality problems 1 Open and then close the right door of the product to log a 54 Error lt XX gt as the latest event in the event log 2 Scroll to and touch Administration 3 Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting 4 Scroll to and touch Event Log ENWW Correct print quality and copy quality problems 267 5 Touch Print 6 Find the most recent event in the log e Ifthe event is a 54 0E 01 Media Sensor event you need to replace the registration second transfer assembly Contact HP Support at www hp com go cljcm6030mfp software or www hp com go cljcm6040mfp software and provide them with this error code e If the event is a 54 0E 02 Media Sensor event you need to replace the product transfer kit Contact HP Support at www hp com support cljem6040mfp or www hp com support clicm6030mfp and provide them with this error code e Ifthe event is a 54 0E 03 Media Sensor event you need to clean the registration second transfer assembly and the media sensor using the following procedure Clean the registration second transfer assembly 1 Open the right door D ll i l Ww
123. d One left two left printed Tray 1 Letterhead or Pre Landscape 2 sided One left two left printed Tray 1 HP Laserjet dum Letterhead or Pre Portrait 1 sided One left two left HP Laserjet printed Trays 2 5 HP Laserjet 110 Chapter 7 Paper and print media ENWW Table 7 6 Load letterhead pre printed or pre punched paper Image Rotation Left to right continued Paper type and Image orientation Duplex mode Staple location How to load for How to load for tray options long edge feed short edge feed Letterhead or Pre Portrait 2 sided One left two left printed Trays 2 5 p Letterhead or Pre Landscape 1 sided One left two left HP Laserjet printed Trays 2 5 v 3 a X Letterhead or Pre Landscape 2 sided One left two left printed Trays 2 5 Pre punched Portrait 1 sided or 2 sided One left two left Tray 1 em fe Pre punched Landscape 1 sided or 2 sided One left two left R Tray 1 Qum o o Pre punched Portrait 1 sided or 2 sided One left two left Trays 2 5 o gt o Pre punched Landscape 1 sided or 2 sided One left two left o Oo o Trays 2 5 o gt fe Load paper and print media 111 Table 7 7 Load letterhead pre printed or pre punched paper Image Rotation Right to left Paper type and tray Letterhead or Pre
124. d on double sided jobs using light weight paper and longer than ten pages Background Off default Turn this feature On if pages are printing with a shaded background Using this feature might reduce gloss On levels Heavy Mode 30 PPM default The default setting is 30 PPM Select the 24 PPM option to reduce the speed and improve fusing on heavy 24 PPM paper Tracking Control Off default Improves color stability by adjusting the bias voltage This setting should remain On On Restore Optimize Select this setting to return all the settings in the Optimize menu to the factory default settings Resolution Image REt 4800 Select Image REt 4800 to produces fast high quality printing that is appropriate for most print jobs 1200X600dpi Select 1200X600dpi to produce the highest quality printing available but it may slow print speed This setting may be useful for jobs that contain very thin lines or fine graphics Color REt Enabled default Enable or disable Resolution Enhancement technology REt which produces print output with smooth angles Disabled curves and edges ENWW Print Quality menu 51 Table 2 16 Print Quality menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Values Description Calibration Cleaning Process Cleaning Page Process Use this feature to create and process a cleaning page for cleaning excess toner off the pressure roller in the fuser The process takes up to 2 5 minutes Quick Calibration Calibrate Performs p
125. d you are using is printed on rough paper Use a smoother xerographic paper If this solves your problem consult with the printer of your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets the specifications for this product Several optimize print modes can be used to address print quality issues See Print Quality menu on page 49 Repetitive defects ruler If defects repeat at regular intervals on the page use this ruler to identify the cause of the defect Place the top of the ruler at the first defect The marking that is beside the next occurrence of the defect indicates which component needs to be replaced 264 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW 36mm 40mm 50mm 71mm 82mm 94mm 144mm 148mm 36 mm Developer roller in an image drum The print quality defect will be in one of the four image drums image drum 40 mm 50 mm Charge roller in an image drum The print quality defect will be spots or dots sometimes caused when feeding labels and will be in one of the four image drums image drum Transfer 1 roller in the transfer unit transfer kit 71mm Transfer 2 roller in the roller kit transfer kit 82 mm Tension in the transfer unit transfer kit 94 mm Image drum The print quality defect will be in one of the four image drums image drum ENWW Correct print quality and copy quality problems 265 144 mm Pressure roller in
126. dded Web server or at www hp com go instantsupport See Embedded Web server on page 183 Secure Disk Erase To protect deleted data from unauthorized access on the product hard drive use the Secure Disk Erase feature This feature can securely erase print and copy jobs from the hard drive Secure Disk Erase offers the following levels of disk security e Non Secure Fast Erase This is a simple file table erase function Access to the file is removed but actual data is retained on the disk until it is overwritten by subsequent data storage operations This is the fastest mode Non Secure Fast Erase is the default erase mode e Secure Fast Erase Access to the file is removed and the data is overwritten with a fixed identical character pattern This is slower than Non Secure Fast Erase but all data is overwritten Secure Fast Erase meets the U S Department of Defense 5220 22 M requirements for the clearing of disk media e Secure Sanitizing Erase This level is similar to the Secure Fast Erase mode In addition data is repetitively overwritten by using an algorithm that prevents any residual data persistence This mode will impact performance Secure Sanitizing Erase meets the U S Department of Defense 5220 22 M requirements for the sanitization of disk media Data affected Data affected covered by the Secure Disk Erase feature includes temporary files that are created during the print and copying process stored jobs proof and
127. ddress that is not in the address book Use the address book You can send e mail to a list of recipients by using the address book feature of the product See your system administrator for information about configuring address lists NOTE Youcan also use the embedded Web server EWS to create and manage the e mail address book The EWS e mail address book can be used to add edit or delete single e mail addresses or e mail distribution lists For more information see Embedded Web server on page 183 Create a recipient list 1 From the Home screen touch E mail 2 Complete one of the following steps e Touch To to open the keyboard screen and then type the recipients e mail addresses Separate multiple e mail addresses with a semicolon or by touching Enter on the touchscreen e Use the address book a On the Send E mail screen touch the address book button to open the address book b Navigate the entries in the address book by using the scroll bar Hold down the arrow to scroll quickly through the list c Highlight the name to select a recipient and then touch the arrow button You can also select a distribution list by touching the drop down list at the top of the screen and then touching All or add a recipient from a local list by touching Local in the drop down list Highlight the appropriate names and then touch the arrow button gt to add the name to your list of recipients You can remove a
128. device Settings tab Provides the ability to configure the device from your computer Configure Device Allows you to configure device settings This page contains the traditional menus found on devices using a control panel display E mail Server Network only Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up incoming and outgoing e mail as well as to set e mail alerts Alerts Network only Allows you to set up to receive e mail alerts for various device and supplies events AutoSend Allows you to configure the device to send automated e mails regarding device configuration and supplies to specific e mail addresses Security Allows you to set a password that must be entered to gain access to the Settings and Networking tabs Enable and disable certain features of the embedded Web server Authentication Manager Allows you to determine which device functions will require a user to provide log in information in order to use those functions LDAP Authentication Allows you to configure a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP server to limit device access to certain users The LDAP server will require a user to provide log in information in order to gain access to the device Edit Other Links Allows you to add or customize a link to another Web site This link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages Device Information Allows you to name the device and assign an asset number to it Enter
129. dress of the product For example if the TCP IP address is 192 168 0 90 type ftp 192 168 0 90 Locate the downloaded RFU file for the product Drag and drop the RFU file onto the PORT icon in the browser window Ef NOTE The product turns off and then on automatically to activate the update When the update process is complete a Ready message displays on the product control panel Use FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection Ef NOTE The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to default settings and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults ENWW 1 A e er 300 Cu 8 9v um EA 12 13 Take note of the IP address on the HP Jetdirect page The HP Jetdirect page is the second page that prints when you print the configuration page NOTE Before upgrading the firmware make sure that the product is not in Sleep mode Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control panel display Open an MS DOS command prompt on your computer Type ftp TCP IP ADDRESS gt For example if the TCP IP address is 192 168 0 90 type ftp 192 168 0 90 Go to the folder where the firmware file is stored Press Enter on the keyboard When prompted for the user name press Enter When prompted for the password press Enter Type
130. driver for Windows Printer drivers provide access to the product features and allow the computer to communicate with the product using a printer language Check the installation notes and readme files on the device CD for additional software and languages HP PCL 6 driver description Recommended for printing in all Windows environments Provides the overall best speed print quality and product feature support for most users Developed to align with the Windows Graphic Device Interface GDI for the best speed in Windows environments Might not be fully compatible with third party and custom software programs that are based on PCL 5 HP postscript level 3 emulation driver description Recommended for printing with Adobe software programs or with other highly graphics intensive software programs Provides support for printing from postscript level 3 emulation needs or for postscript flash font support Performs slightly faster than the PCL 6 driver when using Adobe software programs HP PCL 5 Universal Print Driver description ENWW Recommended for general office printing in Windows environments Compatible with previous PCL versions and older HP LaserJet products The best choice for printing from third party or custom software programs The best choice when operating with mixed environments which require the product to be set to PCL 5 UNIX Linux mainframe Designed for use in corporate Windows environments to provide a single
131. driver for use with multiple printer models Preferred when printing to multiple printer models from a mobile Windows computer Select the correct printer driver for Windows 65 Priority for print settings Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made 99 E NOTE The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program e Page Setup dialog box Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box Settings changed here override settings changed anywhere else e Printdialog box Click Print Print Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box e Printer Properties dialog box printer driver Click Properties in the Print dialog box to open the printer driver Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box do not override settings anywhere else in the printing software e Default printer driver settings The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in all print jobs unless settings are changed in the Page Setup Print or Printer Properties dialog boxes e Printer control panel settings Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority than changes made anywhere else 66 Chapter
132. e Configure the driver settings ENWW Carry out the following steps to print to tough paper from your graphics software program 1 N e A Select Print from the File menu of your software program Select the HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series and then click Properties or Printing Preferences From the Paper type drop down list select the same paper type that you configured on the product control panel Click OK to save the settings and OK to print The print job will automatically be printed from the tray that has been configured for tough paper Print weatherproof maps and outdoor signs 137 Set the duplex alignment For duplexed documents such as brochures set the registration for the tray before printing to ensure the pages align 1 From the control panel touch Administration and then touch Print Quality 2 Touch Set Registration and then touch the tray you are adjusting 3 Touch Test Page and then touch Print 4 Follow the steps on the page that prints 138 Chapter 8 Use product features ENWW 9 Print tasks e Cancela print job e Use features in the Windows printer driver ENWW 139 Cancel a print job You can stop a print request by using the control panel or by using the software program For instructions about how to stop a print request from a computer on a network see the online Help for the specific network software amp NOTE Itcan take some time for all pri
133. e recommending that you order a replacement The product can continue to print using the current image drum until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the image drum The product uses four colors and has a different image drums for each color black K magenta M cyan C and yellow Y Replace an image drum when the control panel displays Replace lt color gt Drum message The control panel display also indicates the color that should be replaced if a genuine HP cartridge is currently installed Replacement instructions are included in the image drum box A CAUTION If toner gets on clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric Ef NOTE Information about recycling used image drums is on the image drum box 198 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Replace image drums 1 Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and pull down to open 2 With one hand lift and slowly pull the used image drum out of the product while supporting the image drum with your other hand A CAUTION If reusing the same image drum do not touch the green cylinder on the bottom of the drum because it can damage the drum 3 Store the used image drum in a protective bag Information about recycling u
134. e equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense 300 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC 17050 1 and EN 17050 1 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company DoC BOISB 0601 01 rel 2 0 Manufacturer s Address 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that the product Product Name HP Color LaserJet CM6030 CM6040 MFP series Accessories CB473A 1x500 sheet input tray stand CB474A 3x500 sheet input tray stand CC516A Booklet Maker CC517A 3 Bin Stapler Stacker Regulatory Model Number BOISB 0601 01 Product Options ALL Toner Cartridges Drums CB390A CB381A CB382A CB383A CB384A CB385A CB386A CB387A conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 60950 1 2001 EN60950 1 2001 A11 IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 A2 EN 60825 1 1994 A1 A2 Class 1 Laser LED Product GB4943 2001 EMC CISPR 22 2005 EN 55022 2006 Class A EN 61000 3 2 2000 A2 EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 EN 55024 1998 A1 A2 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class A ICES 003
135. e name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type C gt copy b C MY DOCUMENTS 3500FW RFU YOUR_SERVER YOUR_COMPUTER 2 Press Enter on the keyboard The control panel shows a message that indicates the progress of the firmware upgrade At the end of the upgrade process the control panel shows the Ready message The message One File Copied appears on the computer screen 220 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Use the HP Jetdirect firmware ENWW The HP Jetdirect network interface in the product has firmware that can be upgraded separately from the product firmware This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7 0 or later on your computer See Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 187 Complete the following steps to update the HP Jetdirect firmware by using HP Web Jetadmin 1 Open the HP Web Jetadmin program 2 Open the Device Management folder in the drop down list in the Navigation panel Navigate to the Device Lists folder 3 Select the device that you want to update 4 In the Device Tools drop down list select Jetdirect Firmware Update 5 Under Jetdirect firmware version the HP Jetdirect model number and current firmware version are listed Make a note of these 6 Goto www hp com go wja firmware 7 Scroll down to the list of HP Jetdirect model numbers and find the model number you wrote down 8 Look at the current firmwa
136. e scanner s carriage head might not read the position of the image accurately During the calibration procedure scanner offset values are calculated and stored The offset values are then used when producing scans so that the correct portion of the document is captured Scanner calibration should be carried out only if you notice offset problems with the scanned images The scanner is calibrated before it leaves the factory It needs to be calibrated again only rarely Before calibrating the scanner print the calibration target 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 ENWW Place letter or A4 size paper in tray 1 and adjust the side guides On the control panel Home screen scroll to and touch Administration Touch Troubleshooting Touch Calibrate Scanner Touch Calibrate to print the first pass of the calibration target Place the first pass of the calibration target face down in tray 1 so that the arrows are facing into the product Touch Start to print the second pass The final calibration target must look like the following figure CAUTION If the calibration target does not look like the figure shown here the calibration process will fail and the quality of scans will be degraded The black areas must extend completely to the short edges of the page If they do not use a black marker to extend the black areas to the edge of the page Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Place the calibration target face up into the ADF and ad
137. e sure to connect the phone line to the fax accessory port which is located in the center of the formatter Do not connect the phone line to the HP Jetdirect port which is nearer the bottom of the formatter 2 Connectthe other end of the phone cord into the phone jack on the wall Push the connector until it clicks or until it is securely seated Because different types of connectors are used in different countries regions the connector might not make an audible click Configure and use the fax features Before you can use the fax features you must configure them in the control panel menus For complete information about configuring and using the fax accessory and for information about troubleshooting 174 Chapter 13 Fax ENWW problems with the fax accessory see the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide This guide is provided with the fax accessory and it is also available on the product User CD Use the Send Fax driver to send a fax from a computer without going to the product control panel See the HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory 300 Send Fax Driver Guide for more information The HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide and HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory 300 Send Fax Driver Guide are both available on the product User CD ENWW Analog fax 175 Digital fax Digital faxing is available when you install the optional HP Digital Sending Software For information about ordering this software go to www hp c
138. eb server settings 185 validating gateway addresses 273 letterhead load 108 letterhead paper loading 144 lights control panel 14 formatter 263 link speed settings 36 Linux software 71 load media configuring 103 loading documents sizes supported 167 scanner glass 167 sizes supported 167 tray 1 103 trays 2 3 4 104 Lock Resources Macintosh 76 locking control panel menus 190 M Macintosh AppleTalk settings 33 driver settings 74 77 drivers troubleshooting 276 HP Printer Utility 75 problems troubleshooting 276 ENWW removing software 74 resize documents 77 software 75 software components 94 staple options 79 support 289 supported operating systems 74 USB card troubleshooting 277 Macintosh driver settings custom size paper 77 Job Storage 80 Services tab 80 watermarks 78 mailbox 3 bin capacity 5 selecting 117 specifications physical 293 maintenance agreements 291 maintenance kit 281 manage EPC 180 EWS 183 information pages 178 supplies 193 Management menu 29 Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS 305 Media 95 media custom size Macintosh settings 77 first page 77 loading tray 2 107 loading tray 2 3 and4 106 loading tray 2 3 or4 104 pages per sheet 78 stapler support 126 supported sizes 97 memory enabling 204 features 4 included 2 75 part numbers 282 Menu button 14 menu map Information menu 18 printing 178 ENWW menus control panel Administration 17 E mail Setup 41 Fax Setup 38 Inform
139. eceee nter eca eese dL eee Dee ze ML e du caede ex dea dante aai duet eei dd 80 Set the color options sssssssssssssssseseeeeeen eere nennen nnne 80 Use the Services MENU ai eere cte terne n eene FERES DA EEN CU EE YE SFR ET QuS ER 80 5 Connect the product USB connector E IHRER 84 Network deeem 85 6 Network configuration Benefits of a network connection 200 0022 2 ccc ce eee eeececeeee cee ee cette eet ee caaeaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceanaesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseaes 88 Supported network protocols cecceseeceecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeecceaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecccnaaeaeeeeeeseeeeeeesecuaeeeeees 89 Configuring network setings 2 eiae ee petri E Dire Fe eadedipbeetide ape abe REDI ue Ee Lee ko e E edes 90 TOPE H ME 90 Internet Protocol IB inire ter Tecta ter teec laa dte eee M Een 90 Transmission Control Protocol TOP ssssssseeemn 90 lgi ebll c r TET 90 Configure IP parameters iter eite Leonhard ek LIED ERE Ries 90 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP ssss 91 BOOTP secreciones a a EEEE E EEA TS 91 Silenlccem PEE 91 Subnet mask sssssssssssssssssseseeenner trennen nennen nenne 91 GalOWayS 91 Default gateway 2 erento he EEN 91 Configure TCP IPv4 parameters sssssssse enne eene enne enne ne
140. een developed for a variety of user needs The system uses key color laser technologies including image enhancements smart supplies and high resolution imaging to provide superior images for general office documents and marketing collateral Optimized for printing on HP color laser high gloss papers HP Image REt 4800 provides superior results on all supported paper and under a variety of environmental conditions Paper selection sRGB For the best color and image quality it is important to select the appropriate paper type from the product menu or from the front panel Standard red green blue SRGB is a worldwide color standard originally developed by HP and Microsoft as acommon color language for monitors input devices scanners digital cameras and output devices products printers plotters It is the default color space used for HP products Microsoft operating systems the Web and most office software sold today SRGB is representative of the typical Windows computer monitor today and the convergence standard for high definition television NOTE Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room s lighting can affect the appearance of colors on your screen The latest versions of Adobe PhotoShop CorelDRAW Microsoft Office and many other software programs use sRGB to communicate color Most importantly as the default color space in Microsoft operating systems sRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to e
141. elapsed time for an update depends on the I O transfer time as well as the time that it takes for the product to re initialize The I O transfer time depends on a number of things including the speed of the host computer that is sending the update If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded while Receiving Upgrade appears on the control panel display the firmware file must be sent again If power is lost during the flash DIMM update while the Performing Upgrade message appears on the control panel display the update is interrupted and the message Resend Upgrade appears in English only on the control panel display In this case you must send the upgrade by using the parallel port Finally any jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are completed before the update is processed Use FTP to upload the firmware through a browser amp NOTE The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to default settings and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults 1 Print a configuration page and note the TCP IP address shown on the EIO Jetdirect page 2 Open a browser window 3 In the address line of the browser type 218 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW 4 5 ftp ADDRESS where lt ADDRESS gt is the ad
142. ement menu 29 Table 2 9 Management menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Values Description Restrict Color Use Color printing access Enable Color default Color If Allowed Disable Color This item allows the administrator to disable or restrict color printing To use the Color If Allowed setting set up user permissions and or application permissions in the embedded Web server HP Easy Printer Care software or Web Jetadmin Color copying access Enable Color default Disable Color Color Black Mix Automatic default Mostly color pages Mostly black pages This item allows the administrator to disable or restrict color copying This item controls how the engine switches from color mode to monochrome mode for maximum performance and print cartridge life Choose Automatic to reset the product to the factory default setting Choose Mostly color pages if nearly all of your print jobs are color with high page coverage Choose Mostly black pages if you print mostly monochrome jobs or a combination of color and monochrome jobs 30 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Initial Setup menu Administration gt Initial Setup Ef NOTE Values shown with default are the factory default values Some menu items have no default Networking and I O Administration gt Initial Setup gt Networking and I O Table 2 10 Networking and I O Menu item Sub menu item Values Description I O Timeout Select
143. ems for Windows ssssssssssssssssseeneeenene enemies 62 Supported printer drivers for Windows sssssssssssssssseeeee eene AEREE EEE EEEn EEEE 63 HP Universal Print Driver UPD sse eene nnn rrr en nnne 64 UPD installation ModE S cie ere oer eae eene HRS INS C RERRRR ERE E TRE ETUR E FUP d EUR P IRE IREA E 64 Select the correct printer driver for Windows sse ee en nennen 65 Priority for print SOUS xij iii o IR oet ERI n Pa d Fade o nile ideae E Fide E NA 66 Change printer driver settings for Windows ssessee enne enne nnns 67 Remove software for Windows ssssssssssssssseeseeesene nennen err nmr nne n sensn nennen nennen sensn sinn 68 Supported utilities for Windows ssssssssssseeenenee en Im nennen nennen nnn en nennen rennen 69 HP Web Jetadmin iio tto gd ar cte dex e cat euadere dca c o 69 Embedded Web server ssssssssssssssssssssssee enne emen EEEE nennen nennen 69 HP Easy Printer Care cet ne dee etes tiie ine Pha E EYED nce 69 Software for other operating systems sssssssssseeeeee nennen nennen nennen nnns 71 4 Use the product with Macintosh Software f r Macintosh i be et EA aede RU ee desaneadawluedaansadhiddeasnaddauganaadedddanina MR RAS 74 Supported operating systems for Macintosh ssssss HH 74 Supported printer drivers for Macintosh sssssssssesseeemen
144. en jobs Light Media Set this feature to On if you are frequently seeing Fuser Delay Jam or Fuser Wrap Jam messages especially when printing on light weight paper or on jobs with heavy toner coverage Media Temp Set this feature to Reduced if you are having problems with paper sticking together in the output bin Environment Enable this feature if the product is operating in a low temperature environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image Line Voltage Enable this feature if the product is operating in a low voltage environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image Background Turn this feature on if pages are printing with a shaded background Using this feature can reduce gloss levels Paper Curl Set this feature to Reduced if excessive curling of paper in the output bin occurs This setting will reduce printing speed and increase the frequency of consumable replacement Pre rotation Turn this feature on if horizontal streaks appear on pages Using this feature increases the warm up time for the device Tray 1 If you are seeing marks on the back side of the paper or extra toner on pages when printing from Tray 1 set the mode to Alternate When the mode is set to Alternate a cleaning cycle will be 270 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW performed after each job that is printed from Tray 1 Using Alternate mode increase wear on all the
145. en the ADF cover 2 3 Wipe the rollers with a clean water dampened lint free cloth A CAUTION Do not pour water directly onto the rollers Doing so might damage the device 4 Locate the separation pad 5 Wipe the pad with a clean water dampened lint free cloth 214 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Close the ADF cover 6 Clean the product 215 ENWW ADF maintenance kit After feeding 60 000 pages through the ADF a Replace Document Feeder Kit message appears on the control panel display This message appears approximately one month before the kit needs to be replaced Order a new kit when this message appears See Part numbers on page 281 for information about ordering a new ADF maintenance kit The ADF maintenance kit includes the following items e One pick up roller assembly e One separation pad e Aninstruction sheet Follow the instructions that come with the kit to install it After replacing the kit reset the ADF maintenance kit count Reset the ADF maintenance kit count 1 On the control panel scroll to and touch Administration Touch Resets Touch Reset Supplies 2 3 4 Touch ADF Maintenance Kit 5 Touch Yes 6 Touch Save 216 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Calibrate the scanner Calibrate the scanner to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system carriage head for ADF and flatbed scans Because of mechanical tolerances th
146. endently Each packet is encoded with IP information such as the IP address of the sender and receiver IP packets can be routed over routers and gateways devices that connect a network with other networks IP communications require no connection When IP packets are sent they might not arrive at their destination in the correct sequence However higher level protocols and programs place the packets in the correct sequence so IP communications are efficient Each node or device that communicates on the network requires an IP address Transmission Control Protocol TCP TCP breaks the data into packets and recombines them on the receiving end by providing a connection oriented reliable and guaranteed delivery service to another node on the network When data packets are received at their destination TCP calculates a checksum for each packet to verify that the data is not corrupt If the data in the packet has been corrupted during transmission TCP discards the packet and requests that the packet be resent IP address A Every host workstation or node on an IP network requires a unique IP address for each network interface This address is used to identify both the network and specific hosts that are located on that network It is possible for a host to query a server for a dynamic IP address each time the product boots up for example using DHCP and BOOTP An IP address contains four bytes of information divided into sections th
147. endix D Regulatory information ENWW Type Carbon monofluoride lithium battery Weight 0 8 grams Location Formatter board User removable No Batterij niet weggooien maar inleveren als KCA X Be SS th as This product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the control panel liquid crystal display that might require special handling at end of life For recycling information you can visit www hp com go recycle or contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industry Alliance www eiae org Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste Instead it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS for supplies containing chemical substance
148. ent in different file formats that the recipient can manipulate With e mail documents are scanned into the product memory and sent to an e mail address or multiple addresses as an e mail attachment Digital documents can be sent in several graphics formats such as TFF and JPG which allows recipients to manipulate the document file in various programs to meet their specific needs Documents arrive in near original quality and then can be printed stored or forwarded In order to use the e mail feature the product needs to be connected to a valid SMTP local area network that includes Internet access Load documents You can scan a document by using either the glass or the ADF The glass and ADF can accommodate Letter Executive A4 and A5 size originals The ADF can also accommodate Legal size originals Smaller originals receipts irregular and worn documents stapled documents previously folded documents and photographs should be scanned by using the glass Multiple page documents can be scanned easily by using the ADF Send documents The product scans both black and white and color originals You can use default settings or change the scanning preferences and file formats The following are the default settings e Color e PDF requires the recipient to have an Adobe Acrobat viewer to view the e mail attachment For information about changing the settings for the current job see Change e mail settings for the current job on
149. entification and a password before they can use any of the DSS features that require authentication Lock the control panel menus To prevent someone from changing the product configuration you can lock the control panel menus This prevents unauthorized users from changing the configuration settings such as the SMTP server The following procedure describes how to restrict access to the control panel menus by using the HP Web Jetadmin software See Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 187 1 2 SU G9 m ce g Open the HP Web Jetadmin program Open the DEVICE MANAGEMENT folder in the drop down list in the Navigation panel Navigate to the DEVICE LISTS folder Select the product In the Device Tools drop down list select Configure Select Security from the Configuration Categories list Type a Device Password In the Control Panel Access section select Maximum Lock This prevents unauthorized users from gaining access to configuration settings 190 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Set the real time clock Use the real time clock feature to set the date and time settings The date and time information is attached to stored print fax and digital send jobs so you can identify the most recent versions of stored print jobs Set the date format 1 2 3 4 5 6 On the control panel scroll to and touch Administration Touch Time Scheduling Touch Date Time Touch Date Format Touch the desired
150. ep resolves the problem you can stop without performing the other steps on the checklist Troubleshooting checklist 1 Make sure the product Ready light is on If no lights are on complete these steps a Check the power cable connections b Check that the power switch is on c Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the product power configuration See the label that is on the back of the product for voltage requirements If you are using a power strip and its voltage is not within specifications plug the product directly into the wall If it is already plugged into the wall try a different outlet d Remove any other products plugged into the same circuit e If none of these measures restores power contact HP Customer Care Check the cabling a Check the cable connection between the product and the computer or network port Make sure that the connection is secure b Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable if possible c Check the network connection See Solve network printing problems on page 274 If the product is in the READY state check to see if any message appear on the control panel display If any error messages appear see Control panel messages on page 227 Ensure that the print paper that you are using meets specifications Print a configuration page see Information pages on page 178 An HP Jetdirect page also prints a Ifthe pages do not print check t
151. er Touch Start Copy The even numbered pages are copied and printed Collate the odd and even numbered printed copies Copy two sided documents automatically The default copy setting is one sided to one sided Use the following procedures to change the setting so you can copy from or to documents that are two sided Make two sided copies from one sided documents 1 2 3 4 5 6 Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing up and with the top of the page leading On the control panel touch Copy Touch Sides Touch 1 sided original 2 sided output Touch OK Touch Start Copy Make two sided copies from two sided documents 1 Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing up and with the top of the page leading On the control panel touch Copy Touch Sides 156 Chapter 11 Copy ENWW 4 Touch 2 sided original 2 sided output 5 Touch OK 6 Touch Start Copy Make one sided copies from two sided documents 1 Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing up and with the top of the page leading On the control panel touch Copy Touch Sides Touch 2 sided original 1 sided output Touch OK D 9X d i WN Touch Start Copy ENWW Copy two sided documents 157 Copy mixed size originals You can copy original documents that are printed on different size
152. er provides access to print cartridges and image drums 10 Output bin 8 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW Back view 1 Interface ports and formatter 2 Lock lever for additional input bins ENWW Product walkaround 9 Interface ports The product has five ports for connecting to a computer or a network The ports are at the left rear corner of the product 1 Foreign interface harness FIH 2 Fax connection when installed 3 Scanner cable 4 Access port for Kensington lock 5 USB 2 0 port 6 EIO expansion slot 7 Network port Serial number and model number location The model number and serial number are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the printer The serial number contains information about the country region of origin the printer version production code and the production number of the printer 10 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW ENWW Model name Model number HP Color LaserJet CM6030 MFP CE664A HP Color LaserJet CM6030f MFP CE665A HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP Q3938A HP Color LaserJet CM6040f MFP Q3939A Product walkaround 11 12 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW 2 Control panel e Use the control panel e Navigate the Administration menu e Informa
153. er 2 Control panel Time Scheduling menu Administration gt Time Scheduling Use this menu to set options for setting the time and for setting the device to enter and exit sleep mode Ef NOTE Values shown with default are the factory default values Some menu items have no default Table 2 8 Time Scheduling menu Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description Date Time Date Format YYYY MMM DD Use this feature to set the current date and default time and to set the date format and time format that are used to time stamp outgoing MMM DD YYYY faxes DD MMM YYYY Date Month Day Year Time Format 12 hour AM PM default 24 hour Time Hour Minute AM PM Sleep Delay 1 Minute default Use this feature to selectthe time interval that the device should remain inactive before 20 minutes entering Sleep Mode 30 minutes 45 minutes 1 hour 60 minutes 90 minutes 2 hours 4 hours Wake Time Monday Off default Select Custom to set a wake time for each day of the week The device exits sleep mode Tuesday Custom according to this schedule Using a sleep schedule helps conserve energy and Wednesday prepares the device for use so that users do not have to wait for it to warm up Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday ENWW Time Scheduling menu 27 Table 2 8 Time Scheduling menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description Sleep Time Monday Off default Use this feature to
154. er has run out of staples Removing the staple cartridge at other times can cause an error to occur NOTE When the stapler stacker or booklet maker runs out of staples the stapler unit will return to its default position automatically Replace the staple cartridge 1 Open the front door of the booklet maker or stapler stacker ENWW Replace supplies 207 2 Push up to on the staple cartridge to remove it from the booklet maker or stapler stacker ol p SE 4 el eB eadi oS m AU E qe 1 D 4 Push the staple cartridge unit into the stapler unit until it clicks into position L1 o i Y pe ae 208 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Replace saddle stitch staple cartridges in the booklet maker 1 Open the front door of the booklet maker 3 Grasp the small blue handle on the staple cartridge unit and pull it toward you then swing the staple cartridge unit into an upright position 4 Grasp the edges of each staple cartridge and pull up firmly to remove the staple cartridges from the staple cartridge unit ENWW Replace supplies 209 5 Unpack the new cartridges and remove the plastic packing lock from each one 6 Hold the new cartridges so that the arrows on the cartridges align with the arrows on the s
155. er kit Replace Fuser Kit 100 000 pages 25 months Roller kit Replace Roller Kit 100 000 pages 25 months Stapler cartridge Replace Stapler Cartridge 5000 staples Booklet maker staple Replace Staple Cartridges 2 2 000 booklets cartridges and 3 Document feeder kit Replace Document Feeder 60 000 pages 50 months Kit C O SS SS I SS Se ee 1 Approximate average A4 letter size page count based on 2 page jobs printed from Tray 2 with 5 coverage of individual colors Approximate life is based on 4 000 pages per month Change print cartridges A When a print cartridge approaches the end of its useful life the control panel displays a message recommending that you order a replacement The product can continue to print using the current print cartridge until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the cartridge The product uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color black K magenta M cyan C and yellow Y Replace a print cartridge when the control panel displays a Replace lt color gt Cartridge message The control panel display will also indicate the color that should be replaced if a genuine HP cartridge is currently installed Replacement instructions are included in the print cartridge box CAUTION If toner gets on clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric Ef NOTE Information about recycling used print cart
156. ervention Examples include an empty paper tray or an error message on the touchscreen Ready light The Ready light indicates that the device is ready to begin processing any job Data light The Data light indicates that the device is receiving data Contrast adjustment dial Turn the dial to adjust the contrast of the touchscreen display for your viewing angle 14 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Home screen The home screen provides access to the device features and it indicates the current status of the device NOTE Depending on how the device has been configured the features that appear on the home Screen can vary TEM a o aa 1 Features Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device the features that appear in this area can include any of the following items e Copy e Fax e E mail e Secondary E mail e Job Status e Network Folder e Job Storage e Workflow e Supplies Status e Administration 2 Device status line The status line provides information about the overall device status Various buttons appear in this area depending on the current status For a description of each button that can appear in the status line see Buttons on the touchscreen on page 16 3 Copy type Shows whether copies are color 4 Copy count The copy count box indicates the number of copies that the device is set to make 5 Help button Touch the Help button to
157. es 188 Foreign Interface Harness FIH sssssssssseeeeeenee eene 188 FREQUITE IMI GINS acces ERE 188 Use the FIA TT 188 Enable the FIH portal 0 ccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeensecsaaaeeeeeees 188 Disable the FIH portal sorin anna a 189 Secure Disk Erase c ceccecceceececceceaeeaceeecaeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee iaka a eais aiaa anidan 189 Data affected CER 189 Gain access to Secure Disk Erase sssssssssssssssseeeeerene 190 Additional Information sess 190 DSS authentication rete epe Fee rete o Te ger edu e dese ie HER REEL ERES d FER TER 190 Lock the control panel menus ect ttt nno ed nte d nene DOR nea C RR Ra 190 SIMI EE Eueee4d EET 191 Sethe date formal rede rer tenet eH E Ee Tea e hau uud een ee E e Ve ea RUN 191 Set the date erraien rannen an nette eee tes ER Yee UHR ER EXTR Re Eie a EAE aE YER Cue Rea 191 Set the time format israse aa aeaa aa a rennes 191 IIIA MUSEI 191 MIETEISIUes2 M L 193 Print cartridge Storage inet a dee e det o SERRA e ERR e Y ERR e ERAS 193 HP policy on non HP print cartridges ssssssnn mem 193 HP fraud hotline and Web site 2 ccc ceceee cece eeeeeeeeee eect eee caeaaaacaaeaaaecaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 193 Replace supplies 3 eer re een IR ages EUER RO a a a a a a daiauadecneenud a PRA EAR 194 ee CE 1
158. es that show the Pages current device settings Supplies Status Print Shows the status of supplies such as Page cartridges maintenance kits and staples Usage Page Print Shows information about the number of pages that have been printed on each paper type and size Color Usage Job Log Print A directory page that contains job by job color usage information Page content includes the user name application name and number of black only pages and color pages File Directory Print A directory page that contains information for any mass storage devices such as flash drives memory cards or hard disks that are installed in this device Fax Reports Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this device Fax Call Report Fax Call Report Print A detailed report of the last fax operation either sent or received Thumbnail on Report Yes Choose whether or not to include a thumbnail of the first page of the fax on the call report No default When to Print Report Never auto print Print after any fax job Print after fax send jobs Print after any fax error default Print after send errors only Print after receive errors only Billing Codes Report Print A list of billing codes that have been used for outgoing faxes This report shows how many sent faxes were billed to each code Blocked Fax List Print A list of phone numbers that are blocked from sending faxes to
159. est mode and is useful for using stacks of the same media type Transparency only e The product does not stop any pages for sensing but distinguishes between transparencies Transparency mode and paper Normal mode e Thisis the fastest mode and is useful for high volume printing in Normal mode For more information about setting these options see Print Quality menu on page 49 Select the paper by source type or size In the Microsoft Windows operating system three settings affect how the printer driver tries to pull media when you send a print job Source Type and Size settings appear in the Page Setup Print or Print Properties dialog boxes in most software programs Unless you change these settings the product automatically selects a tray using the default settings Source To print by Source select a specific tray for the product to pull from If you select a tray that is configured for a type or size that does not match your print job the product prompts you to load the tray with the type or size of print media for your print job before printing it When you load the tray the product begins printing ENWW Configure trays 115 Type and Size Printing by Type or Size means that you want the product to pull from the tray that is loaded with the correct type and size of media Selecting media by type rather than source is similar to locking out trays and helps protect special media from accidental use For example if a t
160. et Mask text box 13 Use the touchscreen keypad to type the subnet mask 14 Touch OK 15 Touch Save Set the default gateway 1 Scroll to and touch Administration Scroll to and touch Initial Setup Touch Networking and I O Touch Embedded Jetdirect Touch TCP IP Touch IPV4 Settings Touch Config Method Touch Manual 2S 5 9 m e MS qe Touch Save e Touch Manual Settings Touch Default Gateway N Touch the Default Gateway text box a 2 Use the touchscreen keyboard to type the default gateway AR Touch OK 15 Touch Save Configure TCP IPv6 parameters For information about configuring the device for a TCP IPv6 network see the HP Jetdirect Print Servers Administrator s Guide ENWW Configuring network settings 93 Network utilities The product can be used with several utilities that make it easy to monitor and manage the product on a network e HP Web Jetadmin See HP Web Jetadmin on page 69 e Embedded Web server See Embedded Web server on page 69 e HP Easy Printer Care software See HP Easy Printer Care on page 69 Other components and utilities Windows Macintosh OS e Software installer automates the printing system e The HP Printer Utility change device settings view installation status and set up printer event notification from a Mac This utility is supported for Mac OS X V10 2 and later e Online Web registration 94 Chapter 6 N
161. etwork configuration ENWW 7 ENWW Paper and print media e Understand paper and print media use e Supported paper and print media sizes e Supported paper types e Special paper or print media guidelines e Load paper and print media e Configure trays e Choose an output location 95 Understand paper and print media use This product supports a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in this user guide Paper or print media that does not meet these guidelines might cause the following problems e Poor print quality e Increased jams e Premature wear on the product requiring repair For best results use only HP brand paper and print media designed for laserjets or multiuse Do not use paper or print media made for inkjet printers Hewlett Packard Company cannot recommend the use of other brands of media because HP cannot control their quality It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this user guide and still not produce satisfactory results This might be the result of improper handling unacceptable temperature and or humidity levels or other variables over which Hewlett Packard has no control A CAUTION Using paper or print media that does not meet Hewlett Packard s specifications might cause problems for the product requiring repair This repair is not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty or service agreements 96 Chapter7 Paper and print media EN
162. fe of the supplies See Information pages on page 178 Paper was not stored correctly Replace the paper in the trays Paper should be stored in the original packaging in a controlled environment Not all product packing material was removed Verify that the packing tape cardboard and plastic shipping locks have been removed from the product If the product still continues to jam contact HP Customer Support or your authorized HP service provider 228 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW Jam locations Use this illustration to identify locations of jams In addition this product provides instructions on the control panel to direct you to the location of jammed paper and how to clear it Ef NOTE Allareas of the product that might need to be opened to clear jams are equipped with green handles Figure 15 1 Jam locations SIT _ O 1 AREA 1 Output bin 2 AREA 2 Fuser area 3 AREA 3 Transfer area 4 AREA 4 Duplexing area 5 AREA 5 Tray 2 pickup area 6 AREA 6 Tray 1 area 7 AREA 7 Optional Trays 3 4 and 5 8 AREA 8 Optional finishing device 9 AREA 9 ADF area Clear jams When a jam occurs a message appears on the control panel display that describes the location of the jam The following table lists the messages that can appear and provides
163. format Touch Save Set the date 1 2 3 4 5 6 On the control panel scroll to and touch Administration Touch Time Scheduling Touch Date Time Touch Date Touch the appropriate options to set the correct month date of the month and the year Touch Save Set the time format 1 2 3 4 5 6 On the control panel scroll to and touch Administration Touch Time Scheduling Touch Date Time Touch Time Format Touch the appropriate format Touch Save Set the time 1 2 3 4 ENWW On the control panel scroll to and touch Administration Touch Time Scheduling Touch Date Time Touch Time Set the real time clock 191 5 Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour minute and AM PM setting 6 Touch Save 192 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Manage supplies Use genuine HP print cartridges for the best printing results Print cartridge storage Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it A CAUTION To prevent damage to the print cartridge do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes HP policy on non HP print cartridges Hewlett Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non HP print cartridges either new or remanufactured A CAUTION Any damage caused by a non HP print cartridge is not covered under the HP warranty and service agreements To install a new HP print cartridge see Cha
164. ge amp NOTE To print a blank cover page select Standard as the Cover Page Type ENWW Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 77 Use watermarks A watermark is a notice such as Confidential that is printed in the background of each page of a document 1 Onthe File menu click Print 2 Open the Watermarks menu 3 Next to Mode select the type of watermark to use Select Watermark to print a semi transparent message Select Overlay to print a message that is not transparent 4 Next to Pages select whether to print the watermark on all pages or on the first page only 5 Next to Text select one of the standard messages or select Custom and type a new message in the box 6 Select options for the remaining settings Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper in Macintosh You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft pages B we mM e On the File menu click Print Select the driver Open the Layout menu Next to Pages per Sheet select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet 1 2 4 6 9 or 16 Next to Layout Direction select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet Next to Borders select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet 78 Chapter 4 Use the pr
165. ge the setting to a specific language the device does not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to the device ENWW Device Behavior menu 47 Table 2 15 Device Behavior menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description PCL Form Length Orientation Type a value between 5 and 128 lines The factory default is 60 lines Portrait default Landscape PCL is a set of printer commands that Hewlett Packard developed to provide access to printer features Select the orientation that is most often used for print jobs Select Portrait if the short edge is at the top or Landscape if the long edge is at the top Font Source Select the source from the list Select the font source for the user soft default font Font Number Type the font number The range is between 0 and 999 The factory Specify the font number for the user soft default font by using the source that is specified in the Font Source menu item The device assigns a number to each font and default is 0 lists it on the PCL font list available from the Administration menu Font Pitch Type a value If Font Source and Font Number indicate a between 0 44 and contour font use this feature to select a 99 99 The factory default pitch for a fixed spaced font default is 10 00 Symbol Set PC 8 default Select any one of several available symbo
166. gle sided or double sided 2 Orientation Portrait Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan originals Select Portrait if the short edge is at the top or select Landscape Landscape if the long edge is at the top Optimize Text Picture Manually Adjust Optimize the output for a particular type of original text pictures or a mixture of both Text If you select Manually Adjust specify the mix of text and pictures that Printed Picture is used most often Photograph 20 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Image adjustment Administration gt Default Job Options gt Image Adjustment Table 2 3 Image Adjustment menu Menu item Values Description Darkness Select a value Select the level of density darkness for the output Background Cleanup Adjust the value within the range Increase the Background Removal setting to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color Sharpness Adjust the value within the range Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image ENWW Default Job Options menu 21 Default Copy Options Administration Default Job Options Default Copy Options Table 2 4 Default Copy Options menu Menu item Sub menu item Values Description Number of Copies Type the number of Set the default number of copies for a copy job copies The factory default setting is 1 Number of Sides 1 Set the default number of sides for copies 2 Color Blac
167. gram 303 remote firmware update RFU 218 removing Macintosh software 74 repeating defects troubleshooting 264 replace image drums 198 memory 201 supplies 194 reset button 14 Resets menu control panel 59 resize documents Macintosh 77 Windows 142 resolution settings 76 specifications 4 troubleshooting quality 264 Resolution Enhancement technology REt 76 resolution adjusting 141 restore factory settings 225 REt Resolution Enhancement technology 76 retention job accessing 129 features 129 personal 131 proof and hold 129 QuickCopy 132 rollers clean ADF 214 ruler repetitive defect 264 S safety statements 308 309 scale documents Macintosh 77 Windows 142 scanner calibration 53 217 ENWW scanner glass clean 212 scanning speed specifications 4 scanning to e mail about 164 167 address books 168 169 configure 164 control panel settings 166 embedded Web server settings 185 job settings 170 LDAP support 164 loading documents 167 recipient lists 168 sending documents 167 settings 164 SMTP support 164 validating addresses 273 scanning to folder 171 scanning to workflow 172 Secure Disk Erase 189 security EWS 188 Foreign Interface Harness FIH 188 locking control panel menus 190 secure disk erase 189 settings 34 security features 6 Send Setup menu 41 Send to Folder 171 Send to Workflow 172 sending to e mail about 164 167 address books 168 169 embedded Web server settings 185 job settings 1
168. hat at least one tray contains print paper b Ifthe page jams in the product see Jams on page 228 If the configuration page prints check the following items a Ifthe page prints correctly then the product hardware is working The problem is with the computer you are using with the printer driver or with the program b Ifthe page does not print correctly the problem is with the product hardware Contact HP Customer Care Select one of the following options Windows Click Start click Settings and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes Double click HP Color LaserJet CM6030 or HP Color LaserJet CM6040 or 224 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW Mac OS X Open Print Center or Printer Setup Utility for Mac OS X v 10 3 and double click the line for the HP Color LaserJet CM6030 or HP Color LaserJet CM6040 Verify that you have installed the HP Color LaserJet CM6030 or HP Color LaserJet CM6040 series printer driver Check the program to make sure that you are using an HP Color LaserJet CM6030 or HP Color LaserJet CM6040 series printer driver Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past If this solution works then the problem is with the program you are using If this solution does not work the document does not print complete these steps a Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed b If you connected the product to the network connect t
169. he Color Options pop up menu to control how colors are interpreted and printed from software programs 1 On the File menu in the software program click Print 2 Select the driver 3 Open the Color Options pop up menu 4 Click Show Advanced Options 5 Adjust the individual settings for text graphics and photographs Use the Services menu If the product is connected to a network use the Services menu to obtain product and supply status information 1 On the File menu click Print 2 Open the Services menu 80 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh ENWW 3 To open the embedded Web server and perform a maintenance task do the following a Select Device Maintenance b Select a task from the drop down list c Click Launch 4 Togo to various support Web sites for this device do the following a Select Services on the Web b Select Internet Services and select an option from the drop down list c Click Gol ENWW Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 81 82 Chapter4 Use the product with Macintosh ENWW 5 Connect the product e USB connection e Network connection ENWW 83 USB connection This product supports one USB 2 0 device connection The USB port is located on the back of the product You must use an A to B type USB cable that is no longer than 2 meters 6 56 feet The USB 2 0 port can be used to connect directly to the product and to upgrade firmware Figure 5 1 USB connection
170. he IP address of the network node such as the workstation or product ENWW Configuring network settings 91 Configure TCP IPv4 parameters If your network doesn t provide automatic IP addressing through DHCP BOOTP RARP or another method you might need to enter the following parameters manually before you can print over the network IP address 4 bytes Subnet mask 4 bytes Default gateway 4 bytes Input or change the IP address You can view the current IP address of the device from the control panel Home screen by touching Network Address Use the following procedure to change the IP address manually 1 Di M CE OY GEM Bo ee NS A A _ M B9 NA 15 Scroll to and touch Administration Scroll to and touch Initial Setup Touch Networking and I O Touch Embedded Jetdirect Touch TCP IP Touch IPV4 Settings Touch Config Method Touch Manual Touch Save Touch Manual Settings Touch IP Address Touch the IP Address text box Use the touchscreen keypad to type the IP address Touch OK Touch Save Set the subnet mask 1 2 3 4 5 Scroll to and touch Administration Scroll to and touch Initial Setup Touch Networking and I O Touch Embedded Jetdirect Touch TCP IP 92 Chapter6 Network configuration ENWW Touch IPV4 Settings Touch Config Method Touch Manual o p o9 Touch Save 10 Touch Manual Settings 11 Touch Subnet Mask 12 Touch the Subn
171. he closest match to the desired color Use the sample s color value in your software program to describe the object you wish to match Colors may ENWW Match colors 149 vary depending on paper type and the software program used For more details on how to use the color samples go to www hp com go cljcm6030mfp software or www hp com go cljom6040mfp software Use the following procedure to print color samples at the product using the control panel 1 Touch Administration and then touch Information 2 Touch Sample pages fonts and then touch CMYK samples or RGB samples to print the samples PANTONE color matching PANTONE has multiple color matching systems PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEMG is very popular and uses solid inks to generate a wide range of color hues and tints See www hp com go cljom6030mfp software or www hp com go cljcm6040mfp software for details on how to use PANTONE Colors with this product NOTE PANTONE Colors generated might not match PANTONE identified standards Consult current PANTONE Publications for accurate color 150 Chapter 10 Use color ENWW Advanced color use HP ImageREt 4800 HP ImageREt 4800 print technology is a system of innovative technologies developed exclusively by HP to deliver superior print quality The HP ImageREt system sets itself apart from the industry by integrating technology advancements and optimizing each element of the print system Several categories of HP ImageREt have b
172. he device They inform you of normal device operation and require no interaction to clear them They change as the state of the device changes Whenever the device is ready not busy and has no pending warning messages the status message Ready appears if the device is online Warning messages Error messages Warning messages inform you of data and print errors These messages typically alternate with the Ready or status messages and remain until you touch OK Some warning messages are clearable If Clearable Warnings is set to Job on the device Device Behavior menu the next print job clears these messages Error messages communicate that some action must be performed such as adding paper or clearing a jam Some error messages are auto continuable If Auto Continue is set on the menus the device will continue normal operation after an auto continuable error message appears for 10 seconds NOTE Pressing any button during the 10 second auto continuable error message overrides the auto continue feature and the button function takes precedence For example pressing the Stop button pauses printing and offers the option to cancel the print job Critical error messages Critical error messages inform you of a device failure Some of these messages can be cleared by turning the device off and then on These messages are not affected by the Auto Continue setting If a critical error persists service is required 226 Chapter 15 Solve p
173. he envelope is loaded correctly This product does not support the envelopes being used Refer to the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide Tray 1 is configured for a size other than envelopes Configure Tray 1 size for envelopes Output is curled or wrinkled Output is curled or wrinkled Cause Solution Paper does not meet the specifications for this product Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this product Paper is damaged or in poor condition Remove paper from the input tray and load paper that is in good condition Product speed needs to be reduced Set the PAPER CURL option in the Print Quality menu to REDUCED to decrease full speed to 10 ppm instead of 40 ppm and 3 4 speed to 7 5 ppm instead of 30 ppm Product is operating in an excessively humid environment Verify that the printing environment is within humidity specifications You are printing large solid filled areas Large solid filled areas can cause excessive curl Try using a different pattern Paper used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed Remove paper and replace it with paper from a fresh moisture unopened package Paper has poorly cut edges Remove paper flex it rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over and then reload it into the input tray Do not fan paper If the problem persists replace the paper The specific paper type was not configured for the tray or Configure the software f
174. he product directly to a computer with a USB cable Redirect the product to the correct port or reinstall the software selecting the new connection type that you are using Restore factory settings Use the Resets menu to restore factory settings 1 2 Scroll to and touch Administration and then touch Resets Touch Restore Factory Settings and then touch Restore For more information see Resets menu on page 59 Factors that affect product performance ENWW Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job Maximum printer speed measured in pages per minute ppm The use of special paper such as transparencies heavy paper and custom size paper Printer processing and download time The complexity and size of graphics The speed of the computer you are using The USB connection The printer I O configuration The amount of printer memory installed The network operating system and configuration if applicable Printer personality HP JetReady PCL or PS NOTE Although additional printer memory can resolve memory problems improve how the printer handles complex graphics and improve download times it will not increase maximum printer speed ppm Solving general problems 225 Control panel message types Four types of control panel messages can indicate the status of or problems with the device Message type Description Status messages Status messages reflect the current state of t
175. his device Use Sleep Delay default Select Use Sleep Delay to set the device to enter sleep mode after the delay that is specified in the Time Scheduling menu Manage Supplies Replace Supplies Stop at low This menu sets the product behavior for when a print cartridge fuser kit or transfer kit is low Choose Stop Stop at out default at low to stop printing when a supply reaches a low condition Choose Stop at out to allow the product to Override at out 1 continue printing until a color print cartridge is empty Override at out 2 Choose Override at out 1 to allow the product to continue printing when the cartridges are empty or when the other supplies are worn out The product stops printing when the toner collection units are full Using this option could reduce print quality Choose Override at out 2 to allow the product to keep printing when the cartridges are empty when other supplies are worn out and when the waste toner collection units are full Using this option can damage the device Supply Low Order Select a value in the Use this menu to carry out administrative supply Threshold range The default is 5 management tasks such as changing the threshold when supplies should be ordered Color Supply Out Stop default This menu sets the product behavior when a color supply is empty When Auto continue black is selected Auto continue black the product will continue printing using black toner only ENWW Manag
176. hoose it This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving predefined pages from the device and tests the embedded Web server Select Yes to choose this test or No to not choose it SNMP Test This test checks operation of SNMP communications by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the device 34 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Table 2 11 Jetdirect menus continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values and Description Select Yes to choose this test or No to not choose it Data Path Test This test helps to identify data path and corruption problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation device It sends a predefined PS file to the device However the test is paperless the file will not print Select Yes to choose this test or No to not choose it Select All Tests Use this item to select all available embedded tests Select Yes to choose all tests Select No to select individual tests Execution Time H Use this item to specify the length of time in hours that an embedded test will be run You can select a value from 1 to 60 hours If you select zero 0 the test runs indefinitely until an error occurs or device is turned off Data gathered from the HTTP SNMP and Data Path tests is printed after the tests have completed Execute No Do not initiate the selected tests Yes Initiate the selected tests Ping Test This test is used to check network commu
177. how edges are rendered Edge control has three components adaptive halftoning Resolution Enhancement technology REt and trapping Adaptive halftoning increases the edge sharpness Trapping reduces the effect of incorrect color alignment by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects The color REt option smoothes the edges NOTE Ifyou notice white gaps between objects or if you notice areas that have a slight shadow of cyan magenta or yellow at the edge choose an edge control setting that increases the trapping level Four levels of edge control are available e Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on e Normal is the default trapping setting Trapping is at a medium level Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on e Light sets trapping at a minimal level Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on e Off turns off trapping adaptive halftoning and color REt Halftone options Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output You can select halftone settings for text graphics and photographs independently The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail e The Smooth option provides better results for large solid filled print areas It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations Choose this option when uniform and smooth area fills are top priority e The Detail option is useful for text and g
178. ice agreements ssssssssssesseeeeeneen ne enne nennen nnne 291 Priority onsite service e e teta e ERR o e ka ane AR e o eR pedis 291 Next day OnSite Service af eene I ete I eee RED Dae e ED d ea REID freue Re DA te inve ee 291 Weekly volume on site service sssssssssseeenm emm ener 291 Appendix C Product specifications Physical specifications soiree cieki iak E E EEEE te denen te dee erre RS nn Ea 294 Electrical specifications ere teri nie RH ee inue eee eR nee aH eee TIS EXR Tee e neun E TWERRERN EU Fee e XREN In ree aa 295 AGCOUSTIC SPCGITICATIONS RE PM 296 Environmental specifications sse treten nennen nnne rrr tnlit nsn n nenne 297 Appendix D Regulatory information xii Compliance with FCC regulations sssseseseeeene nennen enn nennen nnne 300 Declaration of ConfOETmlty oc cities tae ree tenente Eo Een eR ee RR ERE Pee oaa EEE 301 Declaration of Conformity sssssssssssssseee enne eene ener nennen nen enne nnns 302 Environmental product stewardship program sssssssssssssseeneeeeeem mener 303 Protecting the environment 2 careo eager enge E NA rev Dee NIARN ENA see DER RR p dud 303 Ozone production ssssssssssssssssseeenenneneee eer I enr nnn ln nnne nne n entente nnn ns nnne 303 ENWW ENWW sev meonnt iunjeeo pem 303 Toner consumption sosisini isiad iiia a aE nnn nennen nennen te
179. iginals 2 tee detener pear ten EET er each ee eta dda Tni taa ed 158 Change the copy collation setting sessies niaren A AAEE NARRAN AAAA 159 Copy photos and books useisiin iadi a a aaa Ea Eana a aa aa aaea 160 Combine copy jobs by using Job Build ssssseenne eene 161 Cancel a COPY JOD M 162 12 Scan and send to e mail viii Configure e mail settings sssssssssseeneeeenee menn nnne enne 164 SUPPOrted PrOotOCOls ERR 164 Configure e mail server settings 2 2 cece eeetneeee eee ee etre raeeeeeetaeeeeeeeenaeeeeereea 164 Use the Send E mail screen sesssssssssssssseseenenene nennen nenne nennen ss sess saisi daga graria sa naa 166 Perform basic e mail functions inamin ee A A E EE EEE EE A ETATE 167 Load documraenlts tette a dere reddes a A E aaa RA 167 Send doc ments aiaa aa aa AA EEE a E aaa E E Aara dS 167 Send a docutment 5 2 rre an AEE EEEE diode eed Ae as 167 Use the auto complete function sssssssssssse 168 Use the address book ooi de needed o te erre ehh one dedu esee e aae E vd sn anda dud ddM 168 Create a recipient ISE 2 eterne e eate eade vom d ex p da ex un Re IR ER V NR dd 168 Use the local address book cccccccccecsssessesecescceeceeaeaeaeeeeceeeeeeeeseeessessessceeeeeesesaeaeaaness 169 Add e mail addresses to the local address book sssessssssssesss 169 Delete e mail addresses from the local add
180. ignificantly while in Ready and Sleep mode which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product To determine the ENERGY STAR qualification status for this product see the Product Data Sheet or Specifications Sheet Qualified products are also listed at www hp com go energystar Toner consumption EconoMode uses less toner which might extend the life of the print cartridge Paper use This product s optional automatic duplex feature two sided printing and N up printing multiple pages printed on one page capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product s life HP LaserJet print supplies It s easy to return and recycle your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges free of charge with HP Planet Partners Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return multiple cartridges together rather than separately HP is committed to providing inventive high quality products and services that are environmentally sound from product design and manufacturing to distribution customer use and recycling When you participate in the HP Planet Par
181. in exposure to hazardous radiation Canadian DOC regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class A requirements Conforme la classe A des normes canadiennes de compatibilit lectromagn tiques CEM VCCI statement Japan CORBIS TESSALIEIESEEGESEEIAdBSmOCCI OZX I amp 222AAIT amp SREIT EEILCY COBI ECIAEIICHERS CR MBE SHRCFCEMHVET oma EI BEDBRENSCEMHVET Power cord statement Japan N mk ASA SIRI KESEL ESL ASAE BRAK IS fto Sis clas HE A EMI statement Korea ASA geri A ALA ol 7A eesece UARAN te AHAA LLU HY AR TAGAS MAS r2 RAUA HQP wsto lAL7I HSI 308 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW EMI statement Taiwan BEHNK EEPE Em EIS CETEROS PEE TIRE gt nie Eak TE WEAF EHE ERR a ETE General telecom statement The HP Color LaserJet CM6030f MFP and CM6040f MFP models have the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 already installed to provide communication to the public switch telephone network PSTN for fax functionality See the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide for all regulatory approval information and regulatory notices associated with the fax functionality and that device Laser statement for Finland ENWW Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP LaserJet CM6030 CM6040 CM6030f CM6040f laserkirjoitin on kayttajan kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite Normaalissa k yt ss kirjoittimen suojakotelointi est lasers teen
182. in one position at the back or at two positions at the side or top Large capacity output bins The stacker has three bins a 100 sheet bin a 500 sheet bin and a 1000 sheet bin Booklet maker finisher features Table 7 9 Booklet maker finisher features Booklet making The booklet making feature staples and folds print jobs of 2 to 15 pages into a booklet Folding Single sheet print jobs can be automatically folded in the center Job offset Each copy of a job is shifted to one side in the output bin in order to keep each copy separate from the others Supported paper sizes A3 A4 A4 rotated A5 B4 B5 Ledger Legal Letter Letter rotated Statement Two operation modes Mailbox Mode assigns each bin to a user or group of users and Stacker Mode uses both output bins for all print jobs when the top bin is full jobs are routed to the next bin Stapler Built in stapler staples jobs up to 50 sheets in size or 30 stapled jobs Pages can be stapled in one position at the front in one position at the back or at two positions at the side or top Large capacity output bins The stacker has three bins two 1000 sheet bins and one bin that can hold up to 25 saddle stitched booklets Accessory walkaround Figure 7 1 3 bin stapler stacker accessory b i M V ASAT Q pup up pup pcs M VINNA
183. in the printer driver A pop up message displays that provides information about the item Or click Help to open the online Help Use printing shortcuts To perform the following tasks open the printer driver and click the Printing Shortcuts tab amp NOTE In previous HP printer drivers this feature was called Quick Sets How dol Steps to perform Use a printing shortcut Select one of the shortcuts and then click OK to print the job with the predefined settings Create a custom printing shortcut 8 Select an existing shortcut as a base b Select the print options for the new shortcut c Click Save As type a name for the shortcut and click OK Set paper and quality options To perform the following tasks open the printer driver and click the Paper Quality tab How dol Steps to perform Select a page size Select a size from the Paper size drop down list Select a custom page size 8 Click Custom The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens b Type a name for the custom size specify the dimensions and click OK Select a paper source Select a tray from the Paper source drop down list Select a paper type Select a type from the Paper type drop down list Print covers on different paper a In the Special pages area click Covers or Print pages on different paper and then click Settings b Select an option Print the first or last page on different paper to print a blank or preprinted front cove
184. ine the paper size for which the tray is configured The guides in the tray are not against the paper Verify that the guides are touching the paper Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed Cause Solution The correct paper type is not specified in the software or printer driver Verify that the correct paper type is selected in the software or printer driver The input tray is overfilled Remove excess paper from the input tray Do not load more than 200 sheets of glossy paper or glossy film or more than 100 transparencies in Tray 2 3 4 or 5 Do not exceed the maximum stack height marks for Tray 1 Paper in another input tray is the same size as the transparencies and the product is defaulting to the other tray Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is selected in the software program or printer driver Use the product control panel to configure the tray to the paper type loaded The tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is not configured correctly for type Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is selected in the software program or printer driver Use the product control panel to configure the tray to the paper type loaded Transparencies or glossy paper might not meet supported paper specifications Use only paper that meets the HP paper specific
185. int quality for that type 136 Chapter 8 Use product features ENWW Print weatherproof maps and outdoor signs You can use the HP Color LaserJet CM6030 or HP Color LaserJet CM6040 to print durable waterproof maps signs or menus by using HP Tough Paper HP Tough Paper is a waterproof tear proof satin finish paper that retains rich vibrant print color and clarity even when exposed to heavy usage or weather This avoids the expensive and time consuming laminating that is required with plain papers To maximize the quality of this output you must do the following Choose the appropriate paper Configure the paper tray correctly Choose the correct settings in the print driver Supported tough paper HP paper name Product code Product size Control panel and print driver settings HP LaserJet Tough Paper Q1298A Letter HP Tough Paper HP LaserJet Tough Paper Q1298B A4 HP Tough Paper Configure the paper tray Configure the paper tray for the correct paper type 1 e N gt Load the paper into Tray 2 3 4 or 5 After you close the tray the control panel prompts you to configure the paper size and type If the correct size is displayed touch OK to accept the detected size or Modify to choose a different paper size and type When the paper size prompt appears touch the correct size and then touch Save When the paper type prompt appears touch the correct type See the table above to determine the correct paper typ
186. intosh computers HP Printer Utility Use the HP Printer Utility to set up product features that are not available in the printer driver You can use the HP Printer Utility when the product uses a universal serial bus USB cable or is connected to a TCP IP based network Open the HP Printer Utility Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10 2 8 1 Open the Finder and then click Applications 2 Click Library and then click Printers 3 Click hp and then click Utilities 4 Double click HP Printer Selector to open the HP Printer Selector 5 Select the product that you want to configure and then click Utility ENWW Software for Macintosh 75 Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10 3 and V10 4 1 Open the Finder click Applications click Utilities and then double click Printer Setup Utility 2 Select the product that you want to configure and then click Utility Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10 5 A From the Printer menu click Printer Utility or From the Print Queue click the Utility icon HP Printer Utility features The HP Printer Utility consists of pages that you open by clicking in the Configuration Settings list The following table describes the tasks that you can perform from these pages Item Description Configuration Page Prints a configuration page Supplies Status Shows the device supplies status and provides links for online supplies ordering HP Supp
187. inued When connected with a USB cable the product does not appear in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected Cause Solution This problem is caused by either a software or a hardware Software troubleshooting component Check that your Macintosh supports USB Verify that your Macintosh operating system is Mac OS X v10 1 or later Ensure that your Macintosh has the appropriate USB software from Apple Hardware troubleshooting Check that the product is turned on Verify that the USB cable is connected correctly Check that you are using the appropriate high speed USB cable Ensure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing power from the chain Disconnect all of the devices from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host computer Check to see if more than two nonpowered USB hubs are connected in a row on the chain Disconnect all of the devices from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host computer NOTE The iMac keyboard is a nonpowered USB hub 278 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW A Supplies and accessories e Order parts accessories and supplies e Part numbers ENWW 279 Order parts accessories and supplies Several methods are available for ordering parts supplies and accessories e Order directly from HP e Order through service or support providers e Order directly through the embedded Web ser
188. ions on page 184 76 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh ENWW Use features in the Macintosh printer driver Print Create and use printing presets in Macintosh Use printing presets to save the current printer driver settings for reuse Create a printing preset 1 On the File menu click Print 2 Select the driver 3 Select the print settings 4 Inthe Presets box click Save As and type a name for the preset 5 Click OK Use printing presets 1 On the File menu click Print 2 Select the driver 3 Inthe Presets box select the printing preset that you want to use Ef NOTE To use printer driver default settings select Standard Resize documents or print on a custom paper size You can scale a document to fit on a different size of paper 1 On the File menu click Print 2 Open the Paper Handling menu 3 Inthe area for Destination Paper Size select Scale to fit paper size and then select the size from the drop down list 4 If you want to use only paper that is smaller than the document select Scale down only Print a cover page You can print a separate cover page for your document that includes a message such as Confidential 1 On the File menu click Print 2 Select the driver 3 Open the Cover Page menu and then select whether to print the cover page Before Document or After Document 4 Inthe Cover Page Type menu select the message that you want to print on the cover pa
189. itional copies of a job stored on the device hard disk at the control panel 1 From the Home screen touch Job Storage Touch the Retrieve tab Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job 2 3 4 Scroll to and touch the job that you want to print 5 Select the number of copies on the numeric keypad to change the number of copies to print 6 Touch Retrieve Stored Job amp to print the document Delete a QuickCopy job Delete a QuickCopy job at the device control panel when you no longer need it If the device requires additional space to store new QuickCopy jobs the device automatically deletes other stored QuickCopy jobs starting with the oldest job 999 Ef NOTE Stored QuickCopy jobs can be deleted at the control panel or in HP Web Jetadmin 1 From the Home screen touch Job Storage Touch the Retrieve tab Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job 2 3 4 Scroll to and touch the job that you want to delete 5 Touch Delete 6 Touch Yes 132 Chapter 8 Use product features ENWW Use the stored job feature for copy jobs You also can create a stored copy job at the control panel that can be printed at a later time Create a stored copy job 1 O o WO I Oo de e de e Place the original document face down on the glass or face up in the ADF From the Home screen touch Job Storage Touch Create To create a Job Name touch the New Job button to open
190. ity 5 configuring 121 selecting 117 specifications physical 293 staples loading 207 209 stapling jobs 128 Start button 14 Start button control panel touchscreen 16 status embedded Web server 184 Home screen control panel 15 HP Easy Printer Care 180 HP Printer Utility Macintosh 76 Macintosh services tab 80 messages types of 226 Status button 14 Stop button 14 Stop button control panel touchscreen 16 stopping a print request 140 storage cabinet specifications physical 293 318 Index storage job accessing 129 features 129 Macintosh settings 76 80 personal 131 proof and hold 129 QuickCopy 132 settings 29 store jobs Windows 142 storing print cartridges 193 subnet mask 91 92 subnets 91 supplies counterfeit 193 locating 194 management menu 29 non HP 193 ordering 280 ordering through embedded Web server 186 part numbers 281 recycling 303 replace 194 replacement intervals 195 replacing 194 Resets menu 59 status page printing 178 status viewing with embedded Web server 184 status viewing with HP Printer Utility 76 supplies 193 supplies status HP Easy Printer Care 180 supply status Services tab Macintosh 80 Windows 143 support embedded Web server links 186 HP Printer Utility pages 76 maintenance agreements 291 online 143 289 supported media 97 supported utilities for Macintosh 76 system requirements embedded Web server 183 T Taiwan EMI statement 309 TCP IP configuring 90 TCP IP se
191. just the side guides After the calibration target has passed through the ADF once reposition it face down in the ADF and touch Start Place the calibration target face down on the scanner glass touch Start and scan the page After this pass the calibration is complete Calibrate the scanner 217 Upgrade the firmware The product has remote firmware update RFU capability Use the information in this section to upgrade the product firmware Determine the current firmware version 1 From the control panel Home screen scroll to and touch Administration 2 Touch Information 3 Touch Configuration status Pages 4 Touch Configuration Page 5 Touch Print The firmware datecode is listed on the Configuration page in the section called Device Information The firmware datecode has this format YYYYMMDD XX XXX X The first string of numbers is the date where YYYY represents the year MM represents the month and DD represents the date For example a firmware datecode of that begins with 20061125 represents November 25 2006 Download new firmware from the HP Web site To find the most recent firmware upgrade for the product go to www hp com go cljcm6030mfp firmware or www hp com go cljcm6040mfp firmware This page provides instructions for downloading the new firmware version Transfer the new firmware to the product 99 NOTE The product can receive an RFU file update when it is in a ready state The
192. k communications with the print server and network device might be lost Auto default The print server uses auto negotiation to configure itself with the highest link speed and communication mode allowed If auto negotiation fails either 100TX HALF or 10TX HALF is set depending on the detected link speed of the hub switch port A 1000T half duplex selection is not supported 10T Half 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10T Full 10 Mbps Full duplex operation 100TX Half 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100TX Full 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100TX Auto Limits auto negotiation to a maximum link speed of 100 Mbps 36 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Table 2 11 Jetdirect menus continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values and Description 1000TX Full 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Print Protocols Use this item to print a page that lists the configuration of the following protocols IPX SPX Novell NetWare AppleTalk DLC LLC ENWW Initial Setup menu 37 Fax Setup Administration gt Initial Setup gt Fax Setup Table 2 12 Fax Setup menu Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description Required Settings Country Region Countries regions Configure the settings that are legally listed required for outgoing faxes Date Time Date Format Date Time Format Time Fax Header Phone Number Information Company Name PC Fax Send Disabled Use this feature to enable or dis
193. k Auto detect Choose whether the default copy mode is color or black Color Black default Staple Collate Staple None default Set up options for stapling and collating sets of copies One left angled If Collate is selected the device prints a complete copy before starting on the next copy Otherwise the device Two left prints the first page of all copies before printing the second page and so on Two top The staple and collate feature may not be present in One right angled your product These features depend on the optional output accessory installed Two right Collate Off On default Output Bin lt Binname gt Select the default output bin for copies This option is available only if an optional output accessory is installed Edge To Edge Normal recommended If the original document is printed close to the edges default use the Edge To Edge feature to avoid shadows along the edges Combine this feature with the Reduce Edge To Edge Output Enlarge feature to ensure that the entire page appears on the copies Auto Include Margins Off default This feature automatically reduces the image size during scanning so the margins are included On 22 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Default Fax Options Administration gt Default Job Options gt Default Fax Options Table 2 5 Fax Send menu Menu item Sub menu item Values Description Resolution Standard 100x200dpi Set the resolution for se
194. ker or the 3 bin mailbox When you send print jobs to the product from a computer the output is to the standard output bin or the output bin s on the stapler stacker or the 3 bin mailbox Optional output accessories An optional 3 bin stapler stacker or booklet maker finisher accessory can be installed with the product When an accessory is installed an output accessory bridge is also added on top of the product in order to route the print jobs to the accessory output bins ENWW Choose an output location 117 3 bin stapler stacker features Table 7 8 3 bin stapler stacker features M Job offset Each copy of a job is shifted to one side in the output bin in order to keep each copy separate from the others Supported paper sizes A3 A4 A4 rotated A5 B4 B5 Ledger Legal Letter Letter rotated Statement Three operation modes Mailbox Mode assigns each bin to a user or group of users Stacker Mode uses all three output bins for all print jobs when one bin is full jobs are routed to the next bin Function Separator Mode sends copies to bin 1 faxes to bin 2 and print jobs to bin 3 Stapler Built in stapler staples jobs up to 50 sheets in size or 30 stapled jobs Pages can be stapled in one position at the front
195. l 50 additional symbol sets from which to choose sets from the control panel A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font Append CR to LF No default Yes Configure whether a carriage return CR is appended to each line feed LF encountered in backwards compatible PCL jobs pure text no job control Suppress Blank Pages No default Yes This option is for users who are generating their own PCL which could include extra form feeds that cause blank pages to be printed When Yes is selected form feeds are ignored if the page is blank Media Source Mapping Standard default Classic Select and maintain input trays by number when you are not using the device driver or when the software program has no option for tray selection 48 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Print Quality menu Administration gt Print Quality Table 2 16 Print Quality menu Menu item Sub menu item Values Description Adjust Color Highlights Cyan Density Magenta Adjust the darkness or lightness of highlights on a Density Yellow Density printed page Lower values represent lighter highlights Black Density on a printed page and higher values represent darker highlights on a printed page 5 to 5 Default is 0 Midtones Cyan Density Magenta Adjust the darkness or lightness of midtones on a Density Yellow Density printed page Lower values represent lighter midtones Black Den
196. l differences in perception of color e Software programs e Printer drivers e Computer operating system e Monitors and monitor settings e Video cards and drivers e Operating environment humidity for example Keep the above factors in mind when colors on your screen do not perfectly match your printed colors For most users the best method for matching colors on your screen to your product is to print SRGB colors Sample book color matching The process for matching product output to preprinted sample books and standard color references is complex In general you can obtain a reasonably good match to a sample book if the inks used to create the sample book are cyan magenta yellow and black These are usually referred to as process color sample books Some sample books are created from spot colors Spot colors are specially created colorants Many of these spot colors are outside of the range of the product Most spot color sample books have companion process sample books that provide CMYK approximations to the spot color Most process sample books will state which process standards were used to print the sample book In most cases they will be SWOP EURO or DIC To get optimal color matching to the process sample book select the corresponding ink emulation from the product menu If you cannot identify the process standard use SWOP ink emulation Printing color samples To use the color samples select the color sample that is t
197. le manual configuration or Off to disable manual configuration Address Use this item to type a 32 hexadecimal digit IPv6 node address that uses the colon hexadecimal syntax DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified The stateful auto configuration method to be used by the print server is determined by a router The router specifies whether the print server obtains its address its configuration information or both from a DHCPv6 server Router Unavailable If a router is not available the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server Always Whether or not a router is available the print server always attempts to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server Primary DNS Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a primary DNS server that the print server should use Secondary DNS Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a secondary DNS server that the print server should use 32 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Table 2 11 Jetdirect menus continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values and Description Proxy Server Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded applications in the device A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access It caches Web pages and provides a degree of Internet security for those clients To specify a proxy server enter its IPv4 address or fully qualified domain name The name can be up to 255
198. links to the procedures for clearing the jam ENWW Jams 229 A WARNING To avoid electrical shock remove any necklaces bracelets or other metal items before reaching into the inside of the product Type of jam Procedure 13 JJ NT Jam below control panel See AREA 1 Clear jams in the output bin on page 230 13 JJ NT Fuser Area Jam See AREA 2 Clear jams in the fuser on page 232 13 JJ NT Fuser Wrap Jam 13 JJ NT Transfer And Fuser Jam 13 JJ NT Jam Inside Right Door See Clear jams in the duplex area on page 236 13 JJ NT Jam In Tray 2 See AREA 5 Clear jams in Tray 2 and the internal paper path on page 239 13 JJ NT Transfer Area Jam 13 JJ NT Jam In Tray 1 See AREA 6 Clear jams in Tray 1 on page 242 13 JJ NT Jam In Tray 3 See AREA 7 Clear jams in optional Trays 3 4 and 5 on page 245 13 JJ NT Jam In Tray 4 13 JJ NT Jam In Tray 5 13 JJ NT Jam Inside Lower Right Door 13 JJ NT Jam In Input Accessory 13 JJ NT Jam In Left Accessory See AREA 8 Clear jams in the optional finishing devices on page 248 Jam in document feeder See AREA 9 Clear jams in the ADF on page 252 AREA 1 Clear jams in the output bin 1 If jammed paper is visible in the output bin gently pull the paper to remove it 230 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW 2 Open the right door 3 If paper has jammed as it enters the output bin
199. lor LaserJet cyan image drum 35 000 page cyan image drum CB385A HP Color LaserJet yellow image drum 35 000 page yellow image drum CB386A HP Color LaserJet magenta image drum 35 000 page magenta image drum CB387A Maintenance kits Item Description Part number Image fuser kit 110 volt CB457A ENWW Part numbers 281 Item Description Part number Image fuser kit 220 volt CB458A Roller kit CB459A Transfer kit CB463A ADF roller kit CE487A Memory Item Description Part number 200 pin DDR memory DIMM dual inline 128 MB Q7557A memory module 256 MB Q7558A Boosts the ability of the product to handle large or complex print jobs Cables and interfaces Item Description Part number Enhanced I O EIO card HP Jetdirect 635n IPv6 IPsec Print J7961G Server USB cable 2 meter standard USB compatible C6518A device connector 282 Appendix A Supplies and accessories ENWW B Service and support e Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement e Print cartridge limited warranty statement e Color LaserJet Fuser Kit Transfer Kit and Roller Kit Limited Warranty Statement e Customer self repair warranty service e Customer support e Availability of support and service e HP maintenance agreements ENWW 283 Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY HP Color LaserJet CM6030 Series MFP One year limited warranty HP Color LaserJet
200. lt M TIFF TIFF JPEG Select the file format for the file TIFF version TIFF 6 0 default TIFF post 6 0 Specify the TIFF version to use when saving scanned files Output Quality High large file Medium default Low small file Selecting higher quality for output increases the size of the output file Resolution 75 DPI 150 DPI default 200 DPI 300 DPI 400 DPI 600 DPI Select the resolution Use a lower setting to create smaller files Default Job Options menu 25 Default Print Options Administration gt Default Job Options gt Default Print Options Table 2 7 Default Print Options menu Menu item Sub menu item Values Description Copies Per Job Type a value Set the default number of copies for print jobs Default Paper Size List of supported sizes Select a paper size Default Custom Paper Unit of measure Millimeters Configure the default paper size that is used when the Size user selects Custom as the paper size for a print job Inches X Dimension Configure the width measurement for the Default Custom Paper Size Y Dimension Configure the height measurement for the Default Custom Paper Size Output Bin lt binname gt Select the default output bin for print jobs If optional trays are installed output bin options vary Print Sides 1 sided Select whether print jobs are single sided or double sided by default 2 sided 26 Chapt
201. m the print driver sssssssssssssssseeeeeeee 120 Create a booklet from a copy ccc ccteeciecssetaeceeteeeeeneteceeeeedeeecntaceteceeeeenataeateneeeees 120 Configure the accessory operation mode ssssssse eee 121 Select the operating mode at the control panel seessssseusesssss 121 Select the operating mode in the printer driver cccccececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeteees 121 Select the operating mode in the printer driver Mac OS X ssssse 121 8 Use product features venenuerse IMP 124 Sleep and Wake uen tete tend eee piede deka ena e FEL e YER FER a ne eee ead eee Eo Reza 124 Set economy modes from the EWS sssssssssssssse eene eene nnns 125 BEIIIAQGIE3cellgc M 126 Supported paper sizes for stapling eesssssseeeneeeenmer nnns 126 DLAPIS PMINE ODS TELLS 128 Job storage features for print jobs ssssssssesssseeeee eem ennemis 129 Gain access to the job storage features ssssssssssse een 129 Use the proof and hold feature ccccccscccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceecsaeasaeaeecaeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeess 129 Create a proof and hold job ssssssseeeem emm 129 Print the remaining copies of a proof and hold job s es 130 Delete a proof and hold job ssssssss enne 130 Use the personal job feature
202. ment Normal default Optimizes performance in extreme low temperature environments Set this feature to Low Temp if the Low Temp product is operating in a low temperature environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image Line Voltage Normal default Optimizes performance in low voltage conditions Set this feature to 100V if the product is operating in a low 100V voltage environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image Cleaning frequency Normal default Set this feature to Alternate if you are seeing defects in the printed output that repeat at 38 mm 1 5 inch Alternate intervals This feature increases the frequency at which the C roller is cleaned Setting this feature to Alternate might also reduce printing speed and increase the frequency of consumable replacement D Blade bias Normal default Set this feature to Alternate if you are seeing short white vertical lines in the printed output The Alternate setting Alternate might also cause dark spots in the printed output so be sure to test this setting on a few print jobs Waste Bin Normal default Try setting this feature to Alternate if you are seeing lengthwise toner streaks in your printed output Alternate especially in jobs with low toner coverage Discharge Brush Off default Enable this feature in low temperature and low humidity environments if you are seeing specks of toner On scattere
203. n Letter Rotated 279 x 216 mm w w we wi wi 11 x 8 5 in Legal 216 x 356 mm vw w vw vw vw 8 5 x 14 in A4 210 x 297 mm v v w vw 8 27 x 11 69 in A4 Rotated 297 x 210 mm v w v yr vw 11 69 x 8 27 in Executive 184 x 267 mm we 7 24 x 10 51 in 8 5 x 13 216 x 330 mm w 8 5 x 13 in A3 297 x 420 mm v w v vw vw vw 11 69 x 16 54 in A5 148 x 210 mm v 5 83 x 8 27 in A6 105 x 148 mm w 4 13 x 5 83 in Statement 140 x 216 mm vw 5 5 x 8 5 in 11x17 279 x 432 mm v w w w vw ve Ledger 11 x 17 in 98 Chapter 7 Paper and print media ENWW Table 7 3 Supported paper and print media sizes for the optional HP 3 bin Stapler Stacker and HP Booklet Maker Finisher accessories continued Size Dimensions Stacking Angled Angled Two staples Folding Saddle stitch staple left staple right top or side angled angled 12x 18 305 x 457 mm w 12 x 18 in B4 JIS 257 x 364 mm vw w v w vi vw 10 12 x 14 33 in RA3 305 x 430 mm w 12 x 16 93 in SRA3 320 x 450 mm w 12 6 x 17 7 in B5 JIS 257 x 182 mm vw 10 12 x 7 17 in B6 JIS 128 x 182 mm w 5 04 x 7 2 in 8K 270 x 390 mm w 10 63 x 15 35 in 16K 195 x 270 mm v 7 68 x 10 63 in Envelope 9 98 4 x 225 4 mm w 3 88 x 8 88 in Envelope 10 104 77 x 241 3 mm vw 4 12 x 9 5 in Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm w 4 33 x 8 66 in Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm we 6 38 x 9 02 in Envelope B5 176 x 250 mm vw 6 93 x 9 84 in
204. n settings and information about the device the Information tab the Settings tab the Networking tab and the Digital Sending tab Click the tab that you want to view See Embedded Web server sections on page 184 for more information about each tab Embedded Web server 183 Embedded Web server sections Tab or section Options Information tab Provides device status and configuration information Device Status Shows the device status and shows the life remaining of HP supplies with 096 indicating that a supply is empty The page also shows the type and size of print paper set for each tray To change the default settings click Change Settings Configuration Page Shows the information found on the configuration page Supplies Status Shows the life remaining of HP supplies with O percent indicating that a supply is empty This page also provides supplies part numbers To order new supplies click Shop for Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window Event log Shows a list of all device events and errors Usage page Shows a summary of the number of pages the device has printed grouped by size and type Device Information Shows the device network name address and model information To change these entries click Device Information on the Settings tab Control Panel Shows messages from the device control panel such as Ready or Sleep mode on Print Allows you to send print jobs to the
205. nd maintain the product ENWW Page description How to print the page from the product control panel 4 Touch Color Usage Job Log 5 Touch Print File directory 1 From the Home screen touch Administration Contains information for any mass 2 Touch Information storage devices such as flash drives memory cards or hard disks that are 3 Touch Configuration status Pages installed in the device 4 Touch File Directory 5 Touch Print Fax reports 1 From the Home screen touch Administration Five reports show fax activity fax calls 2 Touch Information billing codes blocked fax numbers and speed dial numbers 3 Touch Fax Reports NOTE Fax reports are available only 4 Touch one of the following buttons to print the corresponding report on device models that have fax Y capabilities e Fax Activity Log o Fax Call Report o Billing Codes Report Blocked Fax List o Speed Dial List 5 Touch Print For more information see the fax guide that came with the device Font lists 1 From the Home screen touch Administration Shows which fonts are currently 2 Touch Information installed in the device 3 Touch Sample Pages Fonts 4 Touch one of the following buttons to print the corresponding report E Demonstration Page o RGB Samples E CMYK Samples E PCL Font List E PS Font List 5 Touch Print NOTE The font lists also show which fonts reside on a hard disk accessory or DIMM ENWW Informati
206. nder Installable Options click Update Now in the Automatic Configuration list 262 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW Understand lights on the formatter Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the product is functioning correctly 1 Heartbeat LED 2 HP Jetdirect LEDs This LED exists only if HP Jetdirect is installed HP Jetdirect LEDs The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs The yellow LED indicates network activity and the green LED indicates the link status A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic If the green LED is off a link has failed For link failures check all of the network cable connections In addition you can try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control panel menus 1 Scroll to and touch Administration Touch Initial Setup Touch Networking and I O Touch Embedded Jetdirect or EIO X Jetdirect Touch Link Speed Select the appropriate link speed OU OG Oxo ON Touch Save Heartbeat LED ENWW The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly While the product is initializing after you turn it on the LED blinks rapidly and then turns off When the product has finished the initialization sequence the heartbeat LED pulses on and off If the heartbeat LED is off the formatter might have a problem Contact an HP authorized service or s
207. ne MEN NR AME RI ER nae 228 COMMON causes Of jams oett ana desert aa d eden ER eae Ra aaa E ee ea AREE neis a dead 228 NE Tees ce pr LIP EE 229 I II M 229 AREA 1 Clear jams in the output bin sssn m 230 AREA 2 Clear jams in the fuser sssssssem em 232 Clear jams in the duplex area sssse emen 236 AREA 5 Clear jams in Tray 2 and the internal paper path 239 AREA 6 Clear jams in Tray 1 sssssssee emm 242 AREA 7 Clear jams in optional Trays 3 4 and 5 sssssssssssssuss 245 X ENWW ENWW AREA 8 Clear jams in the optional finishing devices sss 248 Clear jams in the output accessory bridge sssssssssss 248 Clear jams in the sorter area ssssssem 249 Clear jams in the booklet maker ss 250 AREA 9 Clear jams in the ADF sssssssssse mme 252 Clear staple Jams reet ettam beate tes 253 Clear staple jams in the main stapler ssssssss 253 Clear staple jams in the booklet maker sssessss 254 Jam ecoVely ecrit e Ue te Ede ge stri oc bLae ron ble iode fnsdz 257 Paper handling problems ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeneaeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaacaaaaaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 258 Product feeds multiple sheets
208. ne side in the output bin in order to keep each copy separate from the others A4 Letter Staple Normal Controls the speed of the print engine to prevent paper jams by using the stapler Alternate 1 buffer Alternate 2 NOTE The stapler buffer may or may not be used depending on the selected media type or on the sensed media type if Autosense Mode is enabled If the Normal setting is enabled the engine speed will be normal by using the stapler buffer whenever possible If the Alternate 1 setting is enabled and the engine is in Autosense Mode the engine slows down to prevent jams If the product is NOT in Autosense Mode the engine performs at normal speed using the stapler buffer whenever possible If the Alternate 2 setting is enabled the engine always slows down to prevent jams never using the stapler buffer Fold LTR R amp A4 R 4 0 mm Adjusts the fold line for Letter and A4 size paper booklet maker only 3 5 mm 3 0 mm 2 5 mm 2 0 mm 1 5 mm 1 0 mm 44 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Table 2 15 Device Behavior menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description 0 5 mm 0 0 mm 0 5 mm 1 0 mm 1 5 mm 2 0 mm 2 5 mm 3 0 mm 3 5 mm 4 0 mm Fold Legal amp JISB4 4 0 mm Adjusts the fold line for Legal and JIS B4 size paper booklet maker only 3 5 mm 3 0 mm 2 5 mm 2 0 mm 1 5 mm 1 0 mm 0 5 mm 0 0 mm 0 5 mm 1
209. nente nnns 303 Paper USE E aeaa E a EA a EA A A EOST E aE A ES 303 mie Em 303 HP LaserJet print supplies ssssssssssssseseeseeeeenenenn nennen nnns 303 Return and recycling instructions sssssesseenen nennen nnne 304 United States and Puerto RICO sssseseen 304 Multiple returns more than one cartridge ssssss 304 Single returtis uciireece eene dose tra Date a be Dd de du ud 304 SHIPPING iois E 304 Non U S TetUrTis annn a les ee eee neh nda rede eae aed 304 PAD OM ested 304 Material restrictions ccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeegdecaaaaaeaaeneeceseeeeeessascsacenieaeeeeeeeeess 304 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European MIM OU fas deste c r 305 Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS ssssssssseeee enne 305 FOF more Information io toces desee Menden aa URN eb Ld eee qu d ed E RA RU Mdd 306 Centihicate Of VOLAUNILY sere 307 Types of MEMO e 307 Volatile Memoly creiser Aiaia ainiaan eetan E ai EA AAALAC TAA 307 Diesel Aurei 307 Hard disk drive memory ssssssssssseeenee eee mnes 307 Safety statements O E 308 L ser Safety ANE O 308 Canadian DOC regulatloris mcd oce uta ntt exuta Lcd dex pne eu 308 VGC statement Japan
210. nfiguration To specify specific custom dimensions or if the type is not correct touch Modify when the control panel prompts to change the size or type j Zz Le iy 9 D P hi M Lu Me ip Yi D p KE LZ yp 4 Select Custom and then select the Unit of measure X dimension and Y dimension for the custom paper size 5 Select the paper type and then touch Save 6 If the configuration is correct touch Save Load paper and print media 107 Load large size paper into Tray 3 4 or 5 Use the following instructions if you are loading 11x17 RA3 SRA3 or 12 x 18 sized paper into Tray 3 4 or 5 1 Slide open Tray 3 4 or 5 2 Adjust the paper width guide by squeezing the adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size of the paper being used 3 Load the paper into the tray 4 Move the paper stop lever to the correct position for the paper being used e For SRA3 sized paper rotate the lever all the way to the left e For A3 or 11x17 sized paper rotate the lever down into the center position e For RA3 or 12x18 sized paper rotate the lever all the way to the right 5 Slide the tray into the product The control panel shows the tray s media type and size If the configuration is not correct touch Modify and configure the tray to the correct type and size If the configuration is correct touch OK Load letterhead pre printed or pre punched paper To c
211. ng information e The paper type letterhead pre printed or pre punched e The paper tray Tray 1 or Trays 2 through 5 e Image orientation Portrait 1 or Landscape 2 o e One sided or two sided duplex printing ENWW Load paper and print media 109 Stapling The optional stapler stacker or booklet maker output accessory must be attached in order to staple print or copy jobs The staple location can be one left one angled staple located in upper left corner or two left two staples located on left long edge For more information about stapling see Use the stapler on page 126 7 e The arrow in the paper graphic indicates the direction the paper will feed into the printer The paper graphic indicates the direction the paper should be placed in the paper tray The default is to load the paper so that the long edge feeds first This results in the most efficient printing and copying Table 7 6 Load letterhead pre printed or pre punched paper Image Rotation Left to right Paper type and Image orientation Duplex mode Staple location How to load for How to load for tray options long edge feed short edge feed Letterhead or Pre Portrait 1 sided One left two left printed Tray 1 und ip Letterhead or Pre Portrait 2 sided One left two left HP Laserjet printed Tray 1 T a o a o a x Letterhead or Pre Landscape 1 side
212. nge print cartridges on page 195 To recycle the used cartridge follow the instructions included with the new cartridge HP fraud hotline and Web site Call the HP fraud hotline 1 877 219 3183 toll free in North America or go to www hp com go anticounterfeit when you install an HP print cartridge and the control panel message says the cartridge is non HP HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following e You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge e The cartridge does not look like it usually does for example the orange pull tab is missing or the packaging differs from HP packaging ENWW Manage supplies 193 Replace supplies When you use genuine HP supplies the product automatically notifies you when supplies are nearly depleted The notification to order supplies allows ample time to order new supplies before they need to be replaced For more information about ordering supplies see Supplies and accessories on page 279 Locate supplies Supplies are identified by their labeling and their blue plastic handles The following figure illustrates the location of each supply item Figure 14 1 Supply item locations 1 Image drums 2 Print cartridges 3 Document feeder kit 4 Fuser 5 Transfer unit 6 T
213. nications This test sends link level packets to a remote network host then waits for an appropriate response To run a ping test set the following items Dest Type Specify whether the target device is an IPv4 or IPv6 node Dest IPv4 Type the IPv4 address Dest IPv6 Type the IPv6 address Packet Size Specify the size of each packet in bytes to be sent to the remote host The minimum is 64 default and the maximum is 2048 Timeout Specify the length of time in seconds to wait for a response from the remote host The default is 1 and the maximum is 100 Count Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this test Select a value from 1 to 100 To configure the test to run continuously select 0 Print Results If the ping test was not set for continuous operation you can choose to print the test results Select Yes to print results If you select No default results are not printed Execute Specify whether to initiate the ping test Select Yes to initiate the test or No to not run the test ENWW Initial Setup menu 35 Table 2 11 Jetdirect menus continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values and Description Ping Results Use this item to view the ping test status and results using the control panel display You can select the following items Packets Sent Shows the number of packets 0 65535 sent to the remote host since the mos
214. nnen 92 Input or change the IP address ssssse em 92 Set the subnet mask sssssssssssssssssssseeeene enne 92 Set the default gateway eese nenetr aite nte SARAAN ER 93 Configure TCP IPv6 parameters ssssessssseeeenne NARRAN NEENA NNE nenne enne 93 Network utilities H 94 Other components and utilities 22 0 cee cece cece eee eee ee ete eee eae eee aeeaeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeees 94 7 Paper and print media Understand paper and print media use 0 0 cee cece cece eee eeeeeeeeceeeecaeeeeeeeee ener n nennen nennen 96 Supported paper and print media sizes sssssssssssssssseseeeeneenene enne 97 Supported paper types sosisini siiani a aiaa aaia aa rrr snl sensn sessi ni nn sn nennen tns n esses 100 Special paper or print media guidelines sssssssssssssese nemen 102 Load paper and print media ccecceceeceeeceeeeeeeceecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cee ceaaaaeaaecaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteees 103 MORAG TAY T CR 103 Print envelope Sentient i a aaaea a 104 Load trays 2 3 4 Or Des rn tates er near e ana ea nde eH ERR RR o iiaia nde ana e UE EERER 104 Load standard sized media into trays 2 3 4 or 5 sssesessssssssssss 104 Load undetectable standard sized media into Tray 2 3 4 and 5 106 Load custom size media into tray 2 3 4 or 5 ssssssssssssssssssusss 107
215. ns SWOP Common ink standard in the United States and other countries regions Euroscale Common ink standard in Europe and other countries regions Dainippon Ink and Chemical DIC Common ink standard in Japan and other countries regions Custom profile Select this option to use a custom input profile to accurately control color output for example to emulate another HP color LaserJet product To download color profiles go to www hp com and search for CM6030 mfp color profile or CM6040 mfp color profile 152 Chapter 10 Use color ENWW 11 Copy e Use the Copy screen e Set the default copy options e Copy from the scanner glass e Copy from the document feeder e Adjust the copy settings e Copy two sided documents e Copy mixed size originals e Change the copy collation setting e Copy photos and books e Combine copy jobs by using Job Build e Cancel a copy job ENWW 153 Use the Copy screen From the Home screen touch Copy to view the Copy screen Only the first six copy features are immediately visible In order to view additional copy features touch More Options Set the default copy options You can use the administration menu to establish default settings that apply to all copy jobs If necessary you can override most settings for an individual job After that job is complete the product returns to the default settings 1 From the Home screen scroll to and touch Administration 2
216. nt documents Higher default resolution images have more dots per inch dpi so they show more detail Lower resolution images have Fine 200x200dpi fewer dots per inch and show less detail but the file size is smaller Superfine 300x300dpi Fax Header Prepend default Select the position of the fax header on the page Overlay Select Prepend to print the fax header above the fax content and move the fax content down on the page Select Overlay to print the fax header over the top of the fax contents without moving the contents down Using this option could prevent a single page fax from flowing onto another page Table 2 6 Fax Receive menu Menu item Sub menu item Values Description Fax Forwarding Fax Forwarding Off default To forward received faxes to another fax device select Fax Forwarding and Custom Then type the number of Custom the other fax device into the Fax Forwarding Number field When you select this menu item for the first time you are prompted to set up a PIN Type that PIN every time you use this menu This is the same PIN that is used to access the Fax Printing menu Create PIN Stamp Received Faxes Enabled Add the date time senders phone number and page number to each page of the faxes that this device Disabled default receives Fit to Page Enabled default Shrink faxes that are larger than Letter size or A4 size so that they can fit onto a Letter size or A4 size page Disabled
217. ntains an internal hard disk drive 40GB or larger that may retain data after the MFP is powered off The MFP also may contain additional optional compact flash storage or an external EIO hard disk Data stored in these devices may be from incoming outgoing fax or email files stored copy or print jobs fax or email address books or third party solutions Some of this data can be erased from the control panel of the MFP but most must be erased using the Secure Storage Erase features available within HP Web Jetadmin Secure Storage Erase features comply with U S Department of Defense DOD specification 5220 22 M ENWW Certificate of volatility 307 Safety statements Laser safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States The device is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation A WARNING Using controls making adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result
218. nterface cable Make sure to use a high quality cable The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected product in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility Cause Solution The product might not be ready Make sure that the cables are connected correctly the product is on and the ready light is on If you are connecting through a USB or Ethernet hub try connecting directly to the computer or use a different port The product software might not have been installed or was installed incorrectly Make sure that the product PPD is in the following hard drive folder Library Printers PPDs Contents Resources lang lproj 276 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW Table 15 1 Problems with Mac OS X continued The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected product in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility Cause Solution where lang is the two letter language code for the language that you are using If necessary reinstall the software See the getting started guide for instructions The Postscript Printer Description PPD file is corrupt Delete the PPD file from the following hard drive folder Library Printers PPDs Contents Resources lt lang gt lproj where lt lang gt is the two letter language code for the language that you are using Reinstall the software See the getting started guide for instructions The interface cable might be defective or of
219. nting to clear after you have canceled a print job Stop the current print job from the control panel A Press Stop on the control panel Stop the current print job from the software program A dialog box will appear briefly on the screen giving you the option to cancel the print job If several requests have been sent to the device through your software they might be waiting in a print queue for example in Windows Print Manager See the software documentation for specific instructions about canceling a print request from the computer If a print job is waiting in a print queue computer memory or print spooler Windows delete the print job there Click Start click Settings and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes Double click the device icon to open the print spooler Select the print job that you want to cancel and then press Delete If the print job is not cancelled you might need to shut down and restart the computer If the job is not in the print spooler use the Job Status menu from control panel to cancel the job 140 Chapter9 Print tasks ENWW Use features in the Windows printer driver Open the printer driver How dol Steps to perform Open the printer driver On the File menu in the software program click Print Select the printer and then click Properties or Preferences Get help for any printing option Click the symbol in the upper right corner of the printer driver and then click any item
220. o the defaults HP Proactive Support NOTE This item is available from the Overview and Support tabs When enabled HP Proactive Support routinely scans your printing system to identify potential problems Click the more info link to configure how frequently the scans occur This page also provides information about available updates for product software firmware and HP printer drivers You can accept or decline each recommended update Supplies Ordering button Click the Supplies Ordering button on any tab to open the Supplies Ordering window which provides access to online supplies ordering NOTE This item is available from the Overview and Support tabs Ordering list Shows the supplies that you can order for each product To order a certain item click the Order check box for that item in the supplies list You can sort the list by product or by the supplies that need to be ordered the soonest The list contains supplies information for every product that is in the My HP Printers list Shop Online for Supplies button Opens the HP SureSupply Web site in a new browser window If you have checked the Order check box for any items the information about those items can be transferred to the Web site where you will receive information on options for purchasing your selected supplies Print Shopping List button Prints the information for the supplies that have the Order check box selected Alert Settings link NOT
221. ob Name 1 99 to add a number to the end of the existing name or select Replace Existing File to overwrite a job that already has that name Set color options To perform the following tasks open the printer driver and click the Color tab How dol Steps to perform Manually adjust color settings 8 In the Color Options area click Manual and then click Settings b You can adjust the general settings for Edge Control and settings for text graphics and photographs See the online Help in the driver for information about each option Turn off color printing and use only shades of gray In the Color Options area click Grayscale Change the way that colors are rendered In the Color Themes area select an option from the drop down list See the online Help in the driver for information about each option Obtain support and product status information To perform the following tasks open the printer driver and click the Services tab ENWW Use features in the Windows printer driver 143 How do I Steps to perform Obtain support information for the product and order supplies In the Internet Services drop down list select a support online option and click Go Check the status of the product including the level of supplies Click the Device and Supplies Status icon The Device Status page of the HP embedded Web server opens Set advanced printing options To perform the following tasks open the printer
222. ob retention User PIN authentication for stored jobs DSS authentication IPv6 security Copying and sending Modes for text graphics and mixed text and graphics formats Job interrupt feature Multiple pages per sheet Control panel animations for example jam recovery Scan and send to e mail o Local address book for e mail and fax LDAP addressing Send to folder Automatic duplex two sided scanning Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW Quick Reference Job Aids Quick Reference Job Aids provide additional step by step procedures for using this product Access the Quick Reference Job Aids from the product CD or at www hp com support clicm6030mfp or www hp com support clicm6040mfp HP Color Laserjet Z MFP Series Replace staples 2008 Copyright Hewlett Packard Development Company LP ENWW Quick Reference Job Aids 7 Product walkaround Front view HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series 1 Control panel 2 Automatic Document Feeder ADF top cover 3 ADF input tray for copy scan fax originals 4 ADF output bin 5 Right door provides access to the transfer unit transfer roller and fuser unit 6 On Off switch 7 Lower right door 8 HP Color LaserJet CM6030 MFP and HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP Trays 2 and 3 HP Color LaserJet CM6030f MFP and HP Color LaserJet CM6040f MFP Trays 2 3 4 and 5 9 Front cov
223. octets For some networks you may need to contact your Independent Service Provider ISP for the proxy server address Proxy Port Type the port number used by the proxy server for client support The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network and can be a value from 0 to 65535 IPX SPX Enable Off Disable the IPX SPX protocol On default Enable the IPX SPX protocol Frame Type Selects the frame type setting for your network Auto Automatically sets and limits the frame type to the first one detected EN 8023 EN Il EN 8022 and EN SNAP Frame type selections for Ethernet networks AppleTalk Enable Off Disable the AppleTalk protocol On default Enable the AppleTalk protocol DLC LLC Enable Off Disable the DLC LLC protocol On default Enable the DLC LLC protocol ENWW Initial Setup menu 33 Table 2 11 Jetdirect menus continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values and Description Security Print Sec Page Yes default Prints a page that contains the current security settings on the HP Jetdirect print server No A security settings page is not printed Secure Web For configuration management specify whether the embedded Web server will accept communications using HTTPS Secure HTTP only or both HTTP and HTTPS HTTPS Required default For secure encrypted communications only HTTPS access is accepted The print serve
224. oduct features e Economy settings e Use the stapler e Job storage features for print jobs e Print photos or marketing material e Print weatherproof maps and outdoor signs e Set the duplex alignment ENWW 123 Economy settings Sleep and wake Set the sleep delay Use the sleep delay feature to select the time interval the product remains inactive before entering sleep mode The default is one hour 1 2 3 4 Scroll to and touch Administration Touch Time Scheduling Touch Sleep Delay Touch the sleep delay setting that you want and then touch Save Set the wake time Use the wake time feature to wake the product at a set time each day 1 09 CONDO OG ee OS Scroll to and touch Administration Touch Time Scheduling Touch Wake Time Touch the day of the week for the wake time Touch Custom Touch Save Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour minute and AM PM setting If you want to wake the product at the same time each day on the Apply to all days screen touch Yes If you want to set the time for individual days touch No and repeat the procedure for each day Set the sleep time Use the sleep time feature to program the product to enter sleep mode at a set time each day 1 2 3 4 5 6 Scroll to and touch Administration Touch Time Scheduling Touch Sleep Time Touch the day of the week for the sleep time setting Touch Custom Touch Save
225. oduct with Macintosh ENWW Print on both sides of the page duplex printing Use automatic duplex printing 1 2 3 4 5 Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job If you are loading special paper such as letterhead load it in one of the following ways e Fortray 1 load the letterhead paper face up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first e Forall other trays load the letterhead paper face down with the top edge at the back of the tray On the File menu click Print Open the Layout menu Next to Two Sided select either Long Edge Binding or Short Edge Binding Click Print Print on both sides manually T1 T Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job If you are loading special paper such as letterhead load it in one of the following ways e Fortray 1 load the letterhead paper face up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first e For all other trays load the letterhead paper face down with the top edge at the back of the tray CAUTION To avoid jams do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g m 28 Ib bond On the File menu click Print On the Finishing menu select Manually Print on 2nd Side Click Print Follow the instructions in the pop up window that appears on the computer screen before replacing the output stack in tray 1 for printing the second half Go to the printer and remove any blank paper that is in
226. om go digitalsending With digital faxing the product does not need to be connected directly to a phone line Instead the product can send a fax in one of three ways e LAN fax sends faxes through a third party fax provider e Microsoft Windows 2000 fax is a fax modem and Digital Sender Module on a computer that allows the computer to operate as a turnkey gateway fax e Internet fax uses an Internet fax provider to process faxes and the fax is delivered on a traditional fax machine or sent to the user s e mail For complete information about using digital faxing see the documentation that is provided with the HP Digital Sending Software 176 Chapter 13 Fax ENWW 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Information pages HP Easy Printer Care Embedded Web server Use HP Web Jetadmin software Security features Set the real time clock Manage supplies Replace supplies Clean the product ADF maintenance kit Calibrate the scanner Upgrade the firmware 177 Information pages Information pages provide details about the device and its current configuration The following table provides the instructions for printing the information pages Page description How to print the page from the product control panel Menu map 1 From the Home screen touch Administration Shows the control panel menus and 2 Touch Information available settings 3 Touch Configuration status Pages 4 T
227. on pages 179 HP Easy Printer Care Open the HP Easy Printer Care software Use one of the following methods to open the HP Easy Printer Care software e Onthe Start menu select Programs select Hewlett Packard select HP Easy Printer Care and then click Start HP Easy Printer Care Printer Care icon Double click the desktop icon In the Windows system tray in the lower right corner of the desktop double click the HP Easy HP Easy Printer Care software sections HP Easy Printer Care software can provide information about multiple HP products that are on your network as well as any products that are directly connected to your computer Some of the items that are in the following table might not be available for every product The Help button in the upper right corner of each page provides more detailed information about the options on that page Section Options Device List tab When you open the software this is the first page that appears NOTE To return to this page from any tab click My HP Printers in the left side of the window Devices list Shows the products that you can select NOTE The product information appears either in list form or as icons depending on the setting for the View as option The information on this tab includes current alerts for the product If you click a product in the list the HP Easy Printer Care opens the Overview tab for that product Compatible Printers
228. onfiguration page also prints a second page that shows the network settings and status NOTE The HP Jetdirect print server supports various network protocols TCP IP IPX SPX Novell NetWare AppleTalk and DCL LLC Make sure that the correct protocols and network parameters are set correctly On the HP Jetdirect configuration page verify the following items for your protocol o Under HP Jetdirect Configuration the status is I O Card Ready o Protocol status is Ready A AnlP address is listed o The configuration method Config by is listed correctly See the network administrator if you are not sure which method is correct Try printing the job from another computer To verify that a product works with a computer use a USB cable to connectit directly to a computer You will have to reinstall the printing software Print a document from a program that has printed correctly in the past If this works a problem with the network might exist Contact your network administrator for assistance 274 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW Verify communication over the network ENWW If the HP Jetdirect configuration page shows an IP address for the product use this procedure to verify that you can communicate with the product over the network 1 Windows Click Start click Run and then type cmd An MS DOS command prompt opens Or Mac Click Applications click Utilities and then open the Terminal application
229. ontact the network administrator Touch Save Test the SMTP settings ENWW 1 2 3 From the Home screen touch Administration Touch Initial Setup Touch E mail Setup and then touch Test If the configuration is correct Gateways OK appears on the control panel display If the first test was successful send an e mail to yourself by using the digital send feature If you receive the e mail you have successfully configured the digital sending feature If you do not receive the e mail use these actions to resolve issues with the digital sending software Check the SMTP and address to make sure that you typed them correctly Print a configuration page Verify that the SMTP gateway address is correct Make sure that the network is operating correctly Send an e mail to yourself from a computer If you receive the e mail the network is operating correctly If you do not receive the e mail contact your network administrator or Internet service provider ISP Configure e mail settings 165 Use the Send E mail screen Use the touchscreen to navigate through the options on the Send E mail screen oe o Cem 1 Send E mail button Touching this button scans the document and sends an e mail file to the provided e mail OOOO i wu OOOO DOOOO addresses 2 Home button Touching this button opens the Home screen 3 From field Touch this field to open the keyboard and then
230. open the embedded help system 6 Scroll bar Touch the up or down arrows on the scroll bar to see the complete list of available features 7 Sign Out Touch Sign Out to sign out of the device if you have signed in for access to restricted features After you sign out the device restores all options to the default settings 8 Network Address Touch Network Address to find information about the network connection 9 Date and time The current date and time appear here The system administrator can select the format that the device uses to show the date and time for example 12 hour format or 24 hour format j M M ENWW Use the control panel 15 Buttons on the touchscreen The status line on the touchscreen provides information about the status of the device Various buttons can appear in this area The following table describes each button Home button Touch the home button to go to the Home screen from any other screen Start button Touch the Start button to begin the action for the feature that you are using NOTE The name of this button changes for each feature For example in the Copy feature the button is named Start Copy Stop button If the device is processing a print or fax job the Stop button appears instead of the Start button Touch the Stop button to halt the current job The device
231. or Windows 63 HP Universal Print Driver UPD The HP Universal Print Driver UPD for Windows is a single driver that gives you instant access to virtually any HP LaserJet product from any location without downloading separate drivers It is built on proven HP print driver technology and has been tested thoroughly and used with many software programs It is a powerful solution that performs consistently over time The HP UPD communicates directly with each HP product gathers configuration information and then customizes the user interface to show the product s unique available features It automatically enables features that are available for the product such as two sided printing and stapling so you do not need to enable them manually Ef NOTE For more information about the UPD see www hp com go upd UPD installation modes Traditional mode e Usethis mode if you are installing the driver from a CD for a single computer e When installed with this mode UPD operates like traditional printer drivers e Ifyou use this mode you must install UPD separately for each computer Dynamic mode e Usethis mode if you are installing the driver for a mobile computer so you can discover and print to HP products in any location e Use this mode if you are installing UPD for a workgroup e Tousethis mode download UPD from the Internet See www hp com go upd 64 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW Select the correct printer
232. or message might appear or the media might jam 5 Slide the tray into the product The control panel shows the tray s paper type and size If the configuration is not correct touch Modify on the control panel and select the correct configuration If the configuration is correct touch OK Load undetectable standard sized media into Tray 2 3 4 and 5 The following undetectable standard sized media is supported in the 500 sheet trays e Executive JIS 8 5 x 13 e 12x 18 Trays 3 4 or 5 only e B4 ISO e RAS Trays 3 4 or 5 only 106 Chapter 7 Paper and print media ENWW e SRA3 Trays 3 4 or 5 only e B5 ISO A CAUTION Do not print envelopes or unsupported sizes of paper from the 500 sheet trays Print on these types of paper only from Tray 1 Do not overfill the input tray or open it while it is in use Doing so can cause paper jams Load custom size media into tray 2 3 4 or 5 ENWW To use custom media change the size setting on the control panel to Custom and set the unit of measure X dimension and Y dimension See Configure a tray to match print job settings on page 114 for more information 1 Slide open the tray from the product 2 Load the print media as described in steps 2 through 4 of the Load detectable standard size media into Tray 2 3 4 or 5 section Then proceed to step 3 in this procedure 3 Slide the tray into the product The control panel shows the tray type and size co
233. or the paper see the software selected in the software documentation Configure the tray for the paper see Load paper and print media on page 103 The paper has previously been used for a print job Do not re use paper ENWW Paper handling problems 261 Product will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly Product will not duplex print 2 sided jobs or duplexes incorrectly Cause Solution You are trying to duplex on unsupported paper Verify that the paper is supported for duplex printing The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the letterhead letterhead or printed side down with the top of the page toward the back of the product For Tray 2 3 4 and 5 load the paper printed side up with the top of the page toward the back of the product The product model does not support automatic 2 sided The HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP does not support printing automatic 2 sided printing The product configuration is not set for duplexing In Windows run the automatic configuration feature 1 Click the Start button point to Settings and then click Printers for Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes for Windows XP 2 Right click the HP product icon and then click Properties or Printing Preferences 3 Click the Device Settings tab 4 U
234. orrectly print or copy on letterhead pre printed or pre punched paper you need to make sure you load the paper correctly into the tray You might also need to adjust the Image Rotation setting on the product control panel The Image Rotation setting is used to adjust for languages that read from left to right the default or from right to left 108 Chapter 7 Paper and print media ENWW For more information regarding this subject see the Quick Reference Job Aids on the User CD that came with the product or visit www hp com support clicm6030mfp manuals or www hp com support cljcm6040mfp manuals Change the Image Rotation setting 1 At the control panel home screen scroll down and touch Administration Scroll down and touch Device Behavior Scroll down and touch Tray Behavior 2 3 4 Scroll down and touch Image Rotation 5 Touch the correct Image Rotation option The default setting is Left to right 6 Touch OK Choose the correct orientation for loading letterhead pre printed or pre punched paper The tables below should be used as a guide for loading letterhead pre printed or pre punched paper The first table shows the tray loading orientation when Image Rotation is set to Left to right which indicates that the language reads left to right The second table shows the tray loading orientation when Image Rotation is set to Right to left which indicates that the language reads right to left The tables also contain the followi
235. ort Provides access to technical assistance online supplies ordering online registration and recycling and return information File Upload Transfers files from the computer to the device Upload Fonts Transfers font files from the computer to the device Firmware Update Transfers updated firmware files from the computer to the device Duplex Mode Turns on the automatic two sided printing mode Economode amp Toner Density Turns on the Economode setting to conserve toner or adjusts toner density Resolution Changes the resolution settings including the REt setting Lock Resources Locks or unlocks storage products such as a hard disk Stored Jobs Manages print jobs that are stored on the device hard disk Trays Configuration Changes the default tray settings IP Settings Changes the device network settings and provides access to the embedded Web server Bonjour Settings Provides the ability to turn on or off Bonjour support or change the device service name that is listed on a network Additional Settings Provides access to the embedded Web server E mail Alerts Configures the device to send e mail notices for certain events Embedded Web server Supported utilities for Macintosh The device is equipped with an embedded Web server which provides access to information about device and network activities For more information see Embedded Web server sect
236. otocols The product supports the TCP IP network protocol the most widely used and accepted networking protocol Many networking services utilize this protocol For more information see TCP IP n page 90 The following table lists the supported networking services and protocols o Table 6 1 Printing Service name Description port9100 Direct Mode Printing service Line printer daemon LPD Printing service Table 6 2 Network device discovery Service name Description SLP Service Location Protocol Device discovery protocol used to help find and configure network devices Used primarily by Microsoft based programs Bonjour Device discovery protocol used to help find and configure network devices Used primarily by Apple Macintosh based programs Table 6 3 Messaging and management Service name Description HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Allows Web browsers to communicate with embedded Web server EWS embedded Web server Allows a user to manage the product through a Web browser SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Used by network applications for product management SNMP v1 and standard MIB II Management Information Base objects are supported 5 z o o A To 0 o Q o o o El aX Service name Description DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol For automatic IP address assignment The DHCP server provides the product with an IP address Generally no u
237. ouch Administration Menu Map 5 Touch Print The content of the menu map varies depending on the options currently installed in the device For a complete list of control panel menus and possible values see Use the control panel on page 14 Configuration page 1 From the Home screen touch Administration Shows device settings and installed 2 Touch Information accessories 3 Touch Configuration Status Pages 4 Touch Configuration Page 5 Touch Print NOTE If the device contains an HP Jetdirect print server or an optional hard disk drive additional configuration pages print that provide information about those devices Supplies status page 1 From the Home screen touch Administration Shows print cartridge toner levels 2 Touch Information 3 Touch Configuration status Pages 4 Touch Supplies Status Page 5 Touch Print NOTE If you are using non HP supplies the supplies status page might not show the remaining life for those supplies Usage page 1 From the Home screen touch Administration Shows a page count for each size of 2 Touch Information paper printed the number of one sided simplexed or two sided duplexed 3 Touch Configuration status Pages pages and the average percentage of coverage 4 Touch Usage Page 5 Touch Print Color usage job log 1 From the Home screen touch Administration 2 Touch Information 3 Touch Configuration status Pages 178 Chapter 14 Manage a
238. p Glossy 75 g m 20 Ib bond to Maximum stack height Light glossy glossy or Side to be printed on 220 g m 58 Ib bond 54 mm 2 1 in heavy glossy facing up 100 Chapter 7 Paper and print media ENWW Table 7 5 Trays 2 3 4 and 5 paper information continued Type Specifications Quantity Settings Paper orientation Photo media 60 g m 16 Ib bond to Maximum stack height Light glossy glossy or Side to be printed on 220 g m 58 Ib bond 54 mm 2 1 in heavy glossy facing up Cut sheet paper 60 g m 16 Ib bond to Maximum stack height Plain or unspecified Side to be printed on 220 g m 58 Ib bond 54 mm 2 1 in facing up Tough paper 60 g m 16 Ib bond to Maximum stack height HP Tough Paper Side to be printed on 220 g m 58 Ib bond 54 mm 2 1 in facing up Trays 2 3 4 and 5 capacity 54 mm 2 126 in height or 500 sheets of paper whichever is less Supported media types include Cut sheet paper labels OHT glossy paper glossy film photo media and tough paper Basis Weight 60 220 g m 16 58 Ib Duplex printing Provides automatic two sided printing printing on both sides of the paper The paper size range for automatic duplex printing is 175 to 320 mm 6 9 to 12 6 in x 210 to 457 mm 8 3 to 18 in The media weight range is 60 to 220 g m 16 to 58 Ib NOTE HP Color Laser Presentation Paper Glossy Q2546A is not supported with this product Using this type of paper can cause a fuser j
239. per or non postage end facing the back of the printer amp NOTE ForLetter Rotated and A4 Rotated sizes place the side to be printed on face down with the bottom of the page facing into the printer 4 Make sure the stack fits under the tabs on the guides and does not exceed the load level indicators 5 Adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack but do not bend it J c oe c c ENWW Load paper and print media 103 Print envelopes If your software does not automatically format an envelope specify Landscape for page orientation in your software program or printer driver Use the following guidelines to set margins for return and destination addresses on Commercial 10 or DL envelopes Address type Left margin Top margin Return 15 mm 0 6 in 15 mm 0 6 in Destination 102 mm 4 in 51 mm 2 in For envelopes of other sizes adjust the margin settings accordingly Load trays 2 3 4 or 5 Trays 2 3 4 and 5 each hold up to 500 sheets of standard paper or a 54 mm 2 13 inch stack of labels or other thick paper Load standard sized media into trays 2 3 4 or 5 The product automatically detects the following standard sizes of media in these 500 sheet trays Letter Letter rotated Legal Executive 11x17 A3 A4 A4 rotated A5 B4 JIS and B5 JIS A CAUTION Do not print envelopes or unsupported sizes of paper from the
240. per or to both sides of the paper 46 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Table 2 15 Device Behavior menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description General Printing Behavior Override A4 Letter Manual Feed No Yes default Enabled Disabled default When this feature is enabled the job prints on letter size paper when an A4 job is sent but no A4 size paper is loaded in the device or prints on A4 paper when a letter size job is sent but no letter size paper is loaded This option also overrides A3 with ledger size paper and ledger with A3 size paper When this feature is enabled the user can select manual feed from the control panel as the paper source for a job Courier Font Regular default Select which version of the Courier font you want to use Dark Wide A4 Enabled Change the printable area of A4 size paper Disabled default If you enable this option eighty 10 pitch characters can be printed on a single line of A4 paper Print PS Errors Enabled Disabled default Select whether a PostScript PS error page is printed when the device encounters a PS error Print PDF Errors Enabled Disabled default Select whether a PDF error page is printed when the device encounters a PDF error Personality Auto default Select the printer language that the device should use Normally you should not change the language If you chan
241. poor quality Replace the interface cable Make sure to use a high quality cable A print job was not sent to the product that you wanted Cause Solution The print queue might be stopped Restart the print queue Open print monitor and select Start Jobs The wrong product name or IP address is being used Another product with the same or similar name IP address or Rendezvous host name might have received your print job Print a configuration page in order to check the product name IP address or Rendezvous host name Verify that the name IP address or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the product name IP address or Rendezvous host name in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility An encapsulated PostScript EPS file does not print with the correct fonts Cause Solution This problem occurs with some programs e Try downloading the fonts that are contained in the EPS file to the product before printing e Sendthe file in ASCII format instead of binary encoding You are unable to print from a third party USB card Cause Solution This error occurs when the software for USB products is not installed When adding a third party USB card you might need the Apple USB Adapter Card Support software The most current version of this software is available from the Apple Web site ENWW Solve common Macintosh problems 277 Table 15 1 Problems with Mac OS X cont
242. print cartridges Tracking Control This setting should always be set to On Cleaning Frequency Normal Alternate Set this feature to Alternate if you are seeing defects in the printed output that repeat at 38 mm 1 5 inch intervals This feature increases the frequency at which the C roller is cleaned Setting this feature to Alternate might also reduce printing speed and increase the frequency of consumable replacement D Blade Bias Normal Alternate Set this feature to Alternate if you are seeing short white vertical lines in the printed output The Alternate setting might also cause dark spots in the printed output so be sure to test this setting on a few print jobs Waste Bin Normal Alternate Try setting this feature to Alternate if you are seeing lengthwise toner streaks in your printed output especially in jobs with low toner coverage Discharge Brush Off On Enable this feature in low temperature and low humidity environments if you are seeing specks of toner scattered on double sided jobs using lightweight paper and longer than ten pages Print quality troubleshooting pages ENWW Use the built in print quality troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print quality problems 1 2 3 4 Scroll to and touch Administration Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting Touch PQ Troubleshooting Touch Print The product returns to the Ready state after printing the print quality troubleshooting pages Follow the
243. pter 8 Use product features ENWW Use the personal job feature Use the personal job feature to specify that a job is not printed until you release it Your job will be stored on the product and nothing will be printed until you request the job from the product s control panel Once the job is printed it will be automatically removed from the product s job storage Personal jobs can be stored with or without a 4 digit personal identification number PIN To make the job private a PIN must be used Print a personal job You can print a personal job at the control panel after the job has been sent to the product 1 oN v 9v d c Je From the Home screen touch Job Storage Touch the Retrieve tab Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the personal job Scroll to and touch the personal job that you want to print If a PIN is required touch the PIN field Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN and then touch OK Select the number of copies on the numeric keypad to change the number of copies to print Touch Retrieve Stored Job to print the document Delete a personal job A personal job is automatically deleted from the device hard disk after you release it for printing If you want to delete the job without printing it use this procedure 1 e O N ENWW From the Home screen touch Job Storage Touch the Retrieve tab Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the personal job Scroll
244. r Black Alienation Motor Cyan Alienation Motor Magenta Alienation Motor Yellow Alienation Motor This item performs tests to determine whether the paper path sensors are operating correctly Exercise individual parts independently to isolate noise leaking or other issues To start the test select one of the components The test runs the number of times specified in the Repeat option You might be prompted to remove parts from the device during the test Press the Stop button to abort the test 56 Chapter2 Control panel ENWW Table 2 17 Troubleshooting menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description ITB Contact Alienation Tray 2 Pickup Motor Tray 2 Pickup Solenoid Tray 3 Pickup Motor Tray 3 Pickup Solenoid Tray 4 Pickup Motor Tray 4 Pickup Solenoid Tray 5 Pickup Motor Tray 5 Pickup Solenoid Duplexer Reverse Motor Duplexer Feed Motor Duplexer ReFeed Motor Paper Transport Motor Repeat Once Default Determines the number of times the test runs Continuous Print Stop Test Continuous value Isolate faults by stopping the device during from 0 to 60 000 the print cycle and observing where in the milliseconds process the image degrades To run the test Default 0 specify a stop time The next job that is sent to the device stops at the specified time in the process Color Band Test Test Page Print Prints a page that helps identify
245. r If you are connecting through a DSL or cable connection contact the internet service provider to obtain the SMTP server IP address LDAP e LDAP is used to gain access to a database of information When the device uses LDAP it searches a global list of e mail addresses As you begin to type the e mail address LDAP uses an auto complete feature that supplies a list of e mail addresses that match the characters you type As you type additional characters the list of matching e mail addresses becomes smaller e The device supports LDAP but a connection to an LDAP server is not required in order for the device to be able to send to e mail NOTE If you need to change the LDAP settings you must change them by using the embedded Web server For more information see Embedded Web server on page 183 or see the Embedded Web Server User Guide on the product Administrator CD Configure e mail server settings Find the SMTP gateway 1 From the Home screen touch Administration 2 Touch Initial Setup 3 Touch E mail Setup and then touch Find Send Gateways 4 Touch Find 164 Chapter 12 Scan and send to e mail ENWW Configure the SMTP gateway address T 2 3 4 5 From the Home screen touch Administration Touch Initial Setup Touch E mail Setup and then touch SMTP Gateway Type the SMTP gateway address either as an IP address or as a fully qualified domain name If you do not know the IP address or domain name c
246. r back cover or both Or select an option to print the first or last page on different paper c Select options from the Paper source and Paper type drop down lists and then click Add d Click OK Adjust the resolution of printed images In the Print Quality area select an option from the first drop down list See the printer driver online Help for information about each of the available options ENWW Use features in the Windows printer driver 141 Set document effects To perform the following tasks open the printer driver and click the Effects tab How dol Scale a page to fit on a selected paper size Steps to perform Click Print document on and then select a size from the drop down list Scale a page to be a percent of the actual size Click of actual size and then type the percent or adjust the slider bar Print a watermark a Select a watermark from the Watermarks drop down list b To printthe watermark on the first page only click First page only Otherwise the watermark is printed on each page Add or edit watermarks NOTE The printer driver must be stored on your computer for this to work a In the Watermarks area click Edit The Watermark Details dialog box opens b Specify the settings for the watermark and then click OK Set document finishing options To perform the following tasks open the printer driver and click the Finishing tab How do I Steps to
247. r stacker Provides job separation in multiple output bins convenient stapling up to 50 sheet jobs job offset capability and additional output capacity The stacker has three bins a 100 sheet bin a 500 sheet bin and a 1000 sheet bin Optional booklet maker finisher Provides convenient stapling up to 50 sheet jobs saddle stitching up to 15 sheet booklets single sheet v folding job separation and offset capability as well as additional output capacity The booklet maker finisher has three bins two 1000 sheet bins and one bin that can hold up to 25 saddle stitched booklets ADF output bin The ADF output bin is underneath the ADF input tray The bin holds up to 50 sheets of paper and the product automatically stops when this bin is full Supported operating e Windows 20009 systems e Windows XP9 e Windows Server 20039 e Windows Vista e Macintosh OS Connectivity e Local area network LAN connector RJ 45 for the embedded HP Jetdirect print server e One enhanced input output EIO slot e USB2 0 connection e Optional analog fax card e A Foreign Interface Harness FIH connection AUX for connecting other devices e Optional HP Digital Sending Software DSS ENWW Product features 5 6 Table 1 2 Features continued Environmental features Sleep setting saves energy High content of recyclable components and materials Security features Secure Disk Erase Security lock optional J
248. r will appear as a secure site HTTP HTTPS optional Access using either HTTP or HTTPS is permitted IPSEC Specify the Firewall status on the print server Keep Firewall status remains the same as currently configured Disable Firewall operation on the print server is disabled Reset Security Specify whether the current security settings on the print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults No The current security settings are maintained Yes Security settings are reset to factory defaults Diagnostics Embedded Tests This menu provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP IP network connection problems Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault is internal or external to the device Use an embedded test to check hardware and communication paths on the print server After you select and enable a test and set the execution time you must select Execute to initiate the test Depending on the execution time a selected test runs continuously until either the device is turned off or an error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed LAN HW Test HTTP Test CAUTION Running this embedded test will erase your TCP IP configuration This test performs an internal loopback test An internal loopback test will send and receive packets only on the internal network hardware There are no external transmissions on your network Select Yes to choose this test or No to not c
249. ransfer roller Supply replacement guidelines To facilitate the replacement of supplies keep the following guidelines in mind when setting up the product e A Allow sufficient space in the front and on the right side of the product for removing supplies e The product should be located on a flat sturdy surface For instructions on installing supplies see the installation guides provided with each supply item or see more information at www hp com go cljcm6030mfp software or www hp com go clicm6040mfp_ software When you connect select Solve a Problem 194 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW A CAUTION Hewlett Packard recommends the use of genuine HP products in this product Use of non HP products may cause problems requiring service that is not covered by the Hewlett Packard extended warranty or service agreements Approximate replacement intervals for supplies The following table lists the estimated replacement intervals for supplies and the control panel messages that prompt when to replace each item Usage conditions and print patterns may cause results to vary Item Printer message Page count Approximate time period Print cartridges Replace lt color gt Cartridge 17 000 pages for color 4 months for color 20 000 pages for black 5 months for black Image drums Replace lt color gt Drum 35 000 pages Image transfer kit Replace Transfer Kit 150 000 pages 37 months Image fus
250. raphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail Choose this option when sharp edges and details are top priority 146 Chapter 10 Use color ENWW Ef NOTE Some software programs convert text or graphics to bitmap images In these cases setting the color options for photographs also affects how text and graphics appear Neutral Grays The Neutral Grays setting determines the method used for creating gray colors that are used in text graphics and photographs Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting Black Only generates neutral colors grays and black using only black toner This guarantees neutral colors without a color cast 4 Color generates neutral colors grays and black by combining all four toner colors This method produces smoother gradients and transitions to non neutral colors and it produces the darkest black Print in grayscale Select the Print in Grayscale or Print Color as Gray option from the printer driver to print a document in black and white Restrict color use This product includes a Restrict Color setting A network administrator can use the setting to restrict user access to the color printing in order to conserve color toner If you are unable to print in color see your network administrator Restrict color printing and copying from the control panel E 2 3 4 5 Scroll to and touch Administ
251. ration and then touch Management Touch Restrict Color Use Touch Color printing access or Color copying access Select one of the following options e Enable Color default This setting allows color printing capabilities for all users e Color If Allowed The setting allows the network administrator to allow color use for select users and or applications Use the embedded Web server to designate which users and or applications can print in color Color printing access only e Disable Color This setting denies color printing capabilities to all users Touch Save For more information about restricting and reporting color usage go to www hp com go coloraccess RGB Color Color Themes You can change RGB Color settings from the printer driver For more information on accessing the printer driver see Set color options on page 143 for Windows and Set the color options on page 80 for Macintosh ENWW Manage color 147 Five values are available for the RGB Color setting e Select Default SRGB for most printing needs This setting instructs the product to interpret RGB color as SRGB which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium W3C e Select Image optimization SRGB to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap images such as GIF or JPEG files This setting instructs the product to use the best color matching for rendering sRGB bitmap images This setting has no effect on
252. ration menu control panel 17 advanced printing options Windows 144 agreements maintenance 291 alerts e mail 76 alternative letterhead mode 144 anticounterfeit supplies 193 AppleTalk settings 33 Attention light locating 14 automatic media sensing 114 automatic two sided printing path copying documents 156 B billing codes report fax 179 bins capacities 5 locating 8 selecting 117 blank pages troubleshooting 272 blocked fax list printing 179 Bonjour Settings 76 booklet maker configuring 121 features 117 use 119 walkaround 119 books copying 160 BOOTP 91 both sides copying 156 both sides printing on Macintosh settings 76 browser requirements embedded Web server 183 buttons control panel locating 14 touchscreen 16 C cabinet stand specifications physical 293 cable USB part number 282 cables USB troubleshooting 272 calibrate scanner 217 calibrating scanner 53 call report fax 179 Canadian DOC regulations 308 cancel copy jobs 162 print 140 cancel a printrequest 140 capacity 3 bin mailbox 5 ADF 5 output bins 5 stapler stacker 5 cartridges management menu 29 non HP 193 ordering through embedded Web server 186 recycling 303 replace 194 storage 193 warranty 286 cartridges print Macintosh status 80 part numbers 281 clean about 212 214 ADF delivery system 212 ADF rollers 214 Index 311 fuser 267 glass 212 outside of product 212 touchscreen 212 clean page printing 267 clock se
253. ray is configured for letterhead and you select plain paper the product will not pull the letterhead from that tray Instead it will pull from a tray that has plain paper loaded and is configured for plain paper on the product control panel Selecting media by Type and Size results in significantly better print quality for heavy paper glossy paper and transparencies Using the wrong setting might result in unsatisfactory print quality Always print by Type for special print media such as labels or transparencies Print by Size for envelopes if possible e Toprint by Type or Size select the Type or Size from the Page Setup dialog box the Print dialog box or the Print Properties dialog box depending on the software program e Ifyou often print on a certain type or size of media configure a tray for that type or size Then when you select that type or size as you print a job the product automatically pulls media from the tray that is configured for that type or size 116 Chapter 7 Paper and print media ENWW Choose an output location Standard output bins The product has an ADF output bin and the standard output bin for printed pages 1 Standard output bin 2 ADF output bin for copy originals When you scan or copy documents by using the ADF the originals are automatically delivered to the ADF output bin Copies made from the scanner glass are delivered to the standard output bin or the output bin s on the stapler stac
254. re 123 123 123 123 represents the SMTP gateway address 3 Press Enter If the SMTP gateway address is not valid the response contains the message Could not open connection to the host on port 25 Connect Failed 4 Ifthe SMTP gateway address is not valid contact the network administrator Validate the LDAP gateway address Ef NOTE This procedure is for Windows operating systems 1 Open Windows Explorer In the address bar type LDAP immediately followed by the LDAP gateway address For example type LDAP 12 12 12 12 where 12 12 12 12 represents the LDAP gateway address 2 Press Enter If the LDAP gateway address is valid the Find People dialog box opens 3 Ifthe LDAP gateway address is not valid contact the network administrator ENWW Solve fax problems 273 Solve network connectivity problems If the product is having problems communicating with the network use the information in this section to resolve the problem Solve network printing problems amp NOTE HP recommends that you use the product CD to install and set up the product on a network Make sure that the network cable is securely seated into the product s RJ45 connector Make sure that the Link LED on the formatter is lit See Understand lights on the formatter on page 263 Make sure that the I O card is ready Print a configuration page see Information pages on page 179 If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed printing a c
255. re 8 5 x 13 RA4 SRA4 8K 270 x 390 16K 195 x 270 Standard sizes within the custom range for Trays 3 4 and 5 are 8 5 x 13 RA4 SRA4 8K 270 x 390 16K 195 x 270 RAS SRAS and 12 x 18 N w Table 7 2 Supported envelopes and postcards Size Dimensions Tray 1 Trays 2 3 4 5 Envelope 9 98 x 225 mm 3 88 x 8 88 in bd Supported paper and print media sizes 97 Table 7 2 Supported envelopes and postcards continued Size Dimensions Tray 1 Trays 2 3 4 5 Envelope 10 105 x 241 mm 4 13 x 9 49 in w Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 in v Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm 6 93 x 9 84 in w Envelope B5 176 x 250 mm 6 7 x 9 8 in vw Envelope C6 162 x 114 mm 6 4 x 4 5 in w Envelope 98 x 191 mm 3 9 x 7 5 in vw Monarch Double Post Card 148 x 200 mm 5 83 x 7 87 in vw US Index Cards 102 x 152 mm 4 x 6 in and 127 x 203 mm 5x8 in w 1 Weights greater than 160 g m may not perform well but will not harm the product The following paper sizes are supported with the optional HP 3 bin Stapler Stacker and HP Booklet Maker Finisher accessories Table 7 3 Supported paper and print media sizes for the optional HP 3 bin Stapler Stacker and HP Booklet Maker Finisher accessories Size Dimensions Stacking Angled Angled Two staples Folding Saddle stitch staple left staple right top or side angled angled Letter 216 x 279 mm w w w w 8 5 x 11 i
256. re version for the model and see if it is later than the version you wrote down If it is right click on the firmware link and follow the instructions on the Web page to download the new firmware file The file must be saved into the lt drive gt PROGRAM FILES HP WEB JETADMIN DOC PLUGINS HPWJA FIRMWARE WETDIRECT folder on the computer that is running the HP Web Jetadmin software 9 n HP Web Jetadmin return to the main device list and select the digital sender again 10 In the Device Tools drop down list select Jetdirect Firmware Update again 11 On the HP Jetdirect firmware page the new firmware version is listed under Jetdirect Firmware Available on HP Web Jetadmin Click the Update Firmware Now button to update the Jetdirect firmware Upgrade the firmware 221 222 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW 15 Solve problems ENWW Solving general problems Control panel message types Control panel messages Jams Paper handling problems Understand lights on the formatter Correct print quality and copy quality problems Performance problems Solve fax problems Solve e mail problems Solve network connectivity problems Solve common Macintosh problems 223 Solving general problems If the product is not responding properly complete the steps in the following checklist in order If the product does not pass a step follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions If a st
257. recipient from your list by scrolling to highlight the recipient and then touching the remove button X in the middle of the screen 3 The names in the recipient list are placed in the text line of the keyboard screen If you want you can add a recipient that is not found in the address book by typing the e mail address on the keyboard After you are satisfied with your recipient list touch OK 4 Touch OK 5 Finish typing information in the CC and Subject fields on the Send E mail screen if necessary You can check the list of recipients by touching the down arrow in the To text line 6 Press Start 168 Chapter 12 Scan and send to e mail ENWW Use the local address book Use the local address book to store frequently used e mail addresses The local address book can be shared between devices that use the same server to gain access to the HP Digital Sending software You can use the address book when you type e mail addresses in the From To CC or BCC fields You can also add or delete addresses in the address book To open the address book touch the address book button Add e mail addresses to the local address book 1 2 Touch Local Touch the add button F Optional Touch the Name field and in the keyboard that appears type a name for the new entry Touch OK The name is the alias for the e mail address If you do not type an alias name the alias will be the e mail address itself Touch the Addres
258. red correctly for the input tray Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured The guides in the tray are not against the paper Verify that the guides are touching the paper Paper does not feed automatically Paper does not feed automatically Cause Solution Manual feed is selected in the software program Load Tray 1 with paper or if the paper is loaded press the Start button The correct size paper is not loaded Load the correct size paper The input tray is empty Load paper into the input tray Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured The guides in the tray are not against the paper Verify that the rear and width paper guides are touching the paper The manual feed prompt is set to ALWAYS The product Open the tray reload the media and then close the tray always prompts for manual feed even if the tray is loaded Or change the manual feed prompt setting to UNLESS LOADED so that the product prompts for manual feed only when the tray is empty The USE REQUESTED TRAY setting on the product is setto Load the requested tray EXCLUSIVELY and the requested tray is empty The
259. reen and then type the file name 5 Touch Send to Network Folder ENWW Scan to a folder 171 Scan to a workflow destination NOTE This device feature is provided by the optional Digital Sending Software If the system administrator has enabled the workflow functionality you can scan a document and send it to a custom workflow destination A workflow destination gives you the ability to send additional information along with the scanned document to a specified network or file transfer protocol FTP location Prompts for specific information appear on the control panel display The system administrator can also designate a printer as a workflow destination which allows you to scan a document and then send it directly to a network printer for printing 1 Place the document face down on the scanner glass or face up in the ADF 2 From the Home screen touch Workflow 3 Select the destination to which you want to scan 4 In the Text Field field type the data that you want to accompany the file and then touch Send Workflow 172 Chapter 12 Scan and send to e mail ENWW 13 Fax e Analog fax e Digital fax ENWW 173 Analog fax When the analog fax accessory is installed the product can function as a standalone fax machine The HP Color LaserJet CM6030f MFP or HP Color LaserJet CM6040f MFP models come with a fax accessory already installed For the HP Color LaserJet CM6030 MFP or HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP ba
260. reen to add edit or delete fax speed dial entries to and from the product You can use fax speed dials to store frequently used fax numbers or lists of up to 100 fax numbers Up to 100 speed dial entries can be configured ENWW Embedded Web server 185 Tab or section Options Networking tab Network administrators can use this tab to control network related settings for the device when it is connected to an IP based network This tab does not appear if the device is Provides the ability to change directly connected to a computer or if the device is connected to a network using anything network settings from your other than an HP Jetdirect print server computer NOTE The Networking tab can be password protected Other links e HP Instant Support Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions This service analyzes your device error log and configuration information to provide Contains links that connect you to diagnostic and support information specific to your device the Internet e Shop for Supplies Connects to the HP SureSupply Web site where you will receive information on options for purchasing original HP supplies such as print cartridges and paper e Product Support Connects to the support site for the device from which you can search for help regarding general topics NOTE You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links If you use a dial up connection and did not connect when yo
261. res 6 quality troubleshooting 264 speed specifications 4 counterfeit supplies 193 cover pages 77 141 covers locating 8 custom size paper settings Macintosh 77 customer support embedded Web server links 186 HP Printer Utility pages 76 maintenance agreements 291 online 289 D Data light locating 14 date set 191 date setting 27 Declaration of Conformity 301 302 default job options menu 20 default settings Resets menu 59 defects repeating 264 delay sleep 124 density settings 76 Device Behavior menu 42 device discovery 89 device status Macintosh Services tab 80 DHCP 91 diagnostics networks 34 digital faxing 176 digital sending about 164 167 address books 168 169 configure e mail 164 control panel settings 166 embedded Web server settings 185 folders 171 job settings 170 LDAP support 164 loading documents 167 recipient lists 168 sending documents 167 Setup menu 41 SMTP support 164 validating gateway addresses 273 workflow 172 Digital Sending tab embedded Web server 185 DIMMs dual inline memory modules installing 201 part numbers 282 Disk Erase feature 189 ENWW DLC LLC settings 33 document feeder copying two sided documents 156 document feeder kit replacing 216 double sided copying 156 double sided printing Macintosh settings 76 dpi settings 76 drivers Macintosh settings 77 Macintosh troubleshooting 276 presets Macintosh 77 settings 66 67 74 shortcuts Windows 141 supported 63
262. ress book 169 Change e mail settings for the current job sssssssseeeennnneeeeemne nennen 170 Scan toa folder eiu pie DICH eed ee AM MN I A 171 Scan to a workflow destination eeeeesesssssssssseseseenennen enne nemen nnne nn rna rnnt nnns 172 ENWW 13 Fax hurleBruque m 174 Connect the fax accessory to a phone line ssssse 174 Configure and use the fax features ssssssssssssseseeeeene eene 174 Brnchr ee M M ane 176 14 Manage and maintain the product IMPOFMALOM PAGES ec ences beige aaeeceestaaanes 178 HP Easy Printer Care ice re ib Moe bid ce El Doc tee ERR E A A dale abner sanded 180 Open the HP Easy Printer Care software sssssssssssese eee 180 HP Easy Printer Care software sections ssssssssssseeenee enne 180 Embedded W b Server cient e Elta RR REL H NER RR TELE RE NARRA RAV ER RE URA RR E ERROR RR SN MERDA EK KU RR RR ERA 183 Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection sussssss 183 Embedded Web server sections sssssssssseseeeeee men 184 Use HP Web Jetadmin software sess em nmn nnn nn nn en nennen nnn 187 INE c 188 Secure the embedded Web server ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeceeeaaceaaeeaanaaeeaaeeaeceeeneeeeeeee
263. ridge After you correct a problem with the product click the refresh button 9 in the upper right corner of the window to update the status Device Management section Provides links to information about HP Easy Printer Care to advanced product settings and to product usage reports Troubleshooting and Help Provides links to tools that you can use to resolve problems to online product support information and to online HP experts Settings tab Configure product settings adjust print quality settings and find information about specific product features NOTE This tab is not available for some products About Provides general information about this tab General Provides information about the product such as the model number serial number and the settings for date and time if they are available Information Pages Provides links to print the information pages that are available for the product Capabilities Provides information about product features such as duplexing the available memory and the available printing personalities Click Change to adjust the settings Print Quality Provides information about print quality settings Click Change to adjust the settings Trays Paper Provides information about the trays and how they are configured Click Change to adjust the settings Restore Defaults Provides a way to restore the product settings to the factory defaults Click Restore to restore the settings t
264. ridges is on the print cartridge box ENWW Replace supplies 195 Replace print cartridges 1 Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and pull down to open 3 Store the used print cartridge in a protective bag Information about recycling used print cartridges is on the print cartridge box 4 Remove additional print cartridges in the same manner 196 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW 5 Remove the new print cartridge from its protective bag Ef NOTE Store the protective bag in a secure place for future use 6 Hold both sides of the cartridge and shake up and down 5 6 times 7 Align the print cartridge with its slot and insert the print cartridge until it clicks into place 8 Insert additional print cartridges in the same manner ENWW Replace supplies 197 9 Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and lift up to close To recycle the used print cartridge follow the instructions included with the new print cartridge Change image drums When an image drum approaches the end of its useful life the control panel displays a messag
265. roblems ENWW Control panel messages ENWW The product provides robust control panel messaging When a message appears on the control panel follow the on screen instructions to resolve the issue If the product displays an Error or Attention message and no steps are shown to resolve the issue turn the product off then on Contact HP support if you continue to experience issues with the product To get additional information for warnings that appear in the status line touch the Warning button For additional information on a variety of topics touch the Help button in the upper right corner of the home screen Control panel messages 227 Jams Common causes of jams The product is jammed Cause The paper does not meet specifications Solution Use only paper that meets HP specifications See Supported paper and print media sizes on page 97 A component is installed incorrectly Verify that the transfer belt and transfer roller are correctly installed You are using paper that has already passed through a product or copier Do notuse paperthat has been previously printed on or copied An input tray is loaded incorrectly The paper is skewed Remove any excess paper from the input tray Make sure that the stack is below the maximum stack height mark in the tray See Load paper and print media on page 103 The input tray guides are not adjusted correctly Adjust them so they hold the
266. roduct Using this type of paper can cause a fuser jam that might require the replacement of the fuser Two recommended alternatives are HP Color LaserJet Presentation Paper Soft Gloss Q6541A and HP Color LaserJet Brochure Paper Glossy Q6611A Q6610A Configure the paper tray ENWW Configure the paper tray for the correct paper type 1 Load the paper into Tray 2 3 4 or 5 2 After you close the tray the control panel prompts you to configure the paper size and type 3 Ifthe correct size and type is displayed touch OK to accept the detected size and type or Modify to choose a different paper size and type Print photos or marketing material 135 4 When the paper size prompt appears touch the correct size and then touch Save 5 When the paper type prompt appears touch the correct type See the table above to determine the correct paper type Configure the driver settings Carry out the following steps to print to glossy paper from your graphics software program 1 Select Print from the File menu of your software program 2 Select the HP Color LaserJet CM6030 or HP Color LaserJet CM6040 and then click Properties or Printing Preferences 3 From the Paper type drop down list select the same paper type that you configured on the product control panel 4 Click OK to save the settings and OK to print The print job will automatically be printed from the tray that has been configured for glossy paper optimizing pr
267. roduct Push the fuser completely into the printer ay 1 ENWW Jams 235 7 Close the right door i e Clear jams in the duplex area 1 Check for jammed paper inside the product Open the right door i yi 236 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW 2 f paper is jammed below the duplexing unit gently pull the paper downward to remove it ENWW Jams 237 4 Lift the paper feed cover on the inside of the right door If jammed paper is present gently pull the paper straight out to remove it eL ar as oT o Tl i i LI 5 c MT Hah AAN e
268. s for example toner can be obtained by accessing the HP Web site at www hp com go msds or www hp com hpinfo community environment productinfo safety Environmental product stewardship program 305 For more information To obtain information about these environmental topics Visit www hp com go environment or www hp com hpinfo globalcitizenship environment Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products HP s commitment to the environment HP s environmental management system HP s end of life product return and recycling program Material Safety Data Sheets 306 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW Certificate of volatility This is a statement regarding the volatility of customer data stored in memory It also outlines how to erase secure data from the device Types of memory Volatile memory The MFP utilizes volatile memory 64MB on the board and 256MB installed for a total of 320MB to store customer data during the printing and copying process When the MFP is powered off this volatile memory is erased Non volatile memory The MFP utilizes non volatile memory EEPROM to store system control data and user preference settings No customer print or copy data is stored in non volatile memory This non volatile memory can be cleared and restored to factory defaults by performing a Cold Reset or Restore Factory Defaults from the control panel Hard disk drive memory The MFP co
269. s field and in the keyboard that appears type the e mail address for the new entry Touch OK Delete e mail addresses from the local address book Dh NOTE To change an e mail address you must first delete the address and then add the corrected ENWW You can delete e mail addresses that you no longer use address as a new address in the local address book 1 2 Touch Local Touch the e mail address that you want to delete Touch the remove button X in the lower right corner The following confirmation message appears Do you want to delete the selected address es Touch Yes to delete the e mail address es or touch No to return to the Address Book screen Use the address book 169 Change e mail settings for the current job Use the More Options button to change the following e mail settings for the current print job Button Description Document File Type Touch this button to change the type of file the device creates after scanning the document Output Quality Touch this button to increase or decrease the print quality of the file being scanned A higher quality setting produces a larger file size Resolution Color Black Original Sides Touch this button to change the scan resolution A higher resolution setting produces a larger file size Touch this button to determine whether you will scan the document in color or in black and white Touch this button to indicate if the origin
270. s of paper as long as the sheets of paper have one common dimension For example you could combine letter and legal sizes or you could combine A4 and A5 sizes 1 Arrange the sheets in the original document so they all have the same width 2 Place the sheets face up into the document feeder and adjust both paper guides against the document 3 From the Home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Original Size NOTE If this option is not on the first screen touch More Options until the option appears 5 Select Mixed Ltr Lgl and then touch OK 6 Touch Start Copy 158 Chapter 11 Copy ENWW Change the copy collation setting ENWW You can set the device to automatically collate multiple copies into sets For example if you are making two copies of three pages and the automatic collation is on the pages print in this order 1 2 3 1 2 3 If automatic collation is off the pages print in this order 1 1 2 2 3 3 To use the automatic collation the original document size must fit into the memory If it does not the device makes only one copy and a message appears notifying you of the change If that happens use one of the following methods to finish the job e Splitthe job into smaller jobs that contain fewer pages e Make only one copy of the document at a time e Turn off the automatic collation The collation setting you select is in effect for all copies until you change the setting The default setting for automatic copy
271. s the source of a problem In this mode all consumable related errors are ignored Paper Path Sensors Initiate a test of the paper path sensors Paper Path Test Test Page Print Generate a test page for testing the paper handling features Define the path for the test in order to test specific paper paths Source All trays Specify whether the test page is printed from all trays or from a specific tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Additional trays are shown if applicable Destination All bins Select the output option for the test page Send the test page to all output bins or only to a specific bin Duplex Off default Select whether the duplexer should be included in the test On Copies Range 1 500 Select how many pages should be sent from Default is 1 the specified source as part of the test 54 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Table 2 17 Troubleshooting menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description Finishing Paper Path Staples Test Finishing Options Choose from a list of Test the paper handling features on the available options finisher Select the option that you want to test Destination Bin Media Size Letter Select the paper size for the test A4 Media Type Select from a list of Select the paper type for the test types Copies Range 2 30 Select the number of copies to include in the Default 2 test Duplex Off Select whether
272. se d operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product or e improper site preparation or maintenance TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country region to country region state to state or province to province HP s limited warranty is valid in any country region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards HP will not alter form fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA
273. se models you can order this accessory as an option See Part numbers on page 281 for information about ordering the analog fax accessory Specifications for the Analog Fax Accessory are available in the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide An electronic version of this guide is located on the User CD that comes with the product The Analog Fax Accessory 300 Fax Guide and the Analog Fax Accessory 300 Send Fax Driver Guide are also located on the product User CD or at www hp com go mfpfaxaccessory300 Connect the fax accessory to a phone line When connecting the fax accessory to a phone line ensure that the phone line being used for the fax accessory is a dedicated line that is not used by any other devices Also this line should be an analog line because the fax will not function correctly if it is connected to some digital PBX systems If you are not sure whether you have an analog or digital phone line contact your telecom provider NOTE HP recommends using the phone cord that comes with the fax accessory to ensure that the accessory functions correctly Follow these instructions to connect the fax accessory to a phone jack 1 Locate the phone cord that is included with the fax accessory kit Connect one end of the phone cord into the fax accessory phone jack that is on the formatter Push the connector until it clicks A CAUTION B
274. sed image drums is on the image drum box 4 Remove additional image drums in the same manner ENWW Replace supplies 199 5 Remove the new image drum from its protective bag Ef NOTE Store protective bag in a secure place for future use NOTE Do not shake the image drum A CAUTION Do not touch the green cylinder on the bottom of the image drum because it can damage the drum 6 Align the image drum with the correct slot and insert the image drum until it clicks into place The gray protective cover on the bottom of the drum automatically slides off as the image drum is inserted You can discard this cover 7 Insert additional image drums in the same manner 8 Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and lift up to close 200 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW To recycle the used image drum follow the instructions included with the new image drum Install memory You can install more memory for the product A CAUTION Static electricity can damage DIMMs When handling DIMMs either wear an antistatic wrist strap or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the product Install DDR memory DIMMs 1 Turn the product off 2 Disconnect all power and interface cables
275. ser intervention is required for the product to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol For automatic IP address assignment The BOOTP server provides the product with an IP address Requires the administrator to input a product s MAC hardware address on the BOOTP server for the product to obtain an IP address from that server Auto IP For automatic IP address assignment If neither a DHCP server nor a BOOTP server is present the product uses this service to generate a unique IP address ENWW Supported network protocols 89 Configuring network settings TCP IP You might need to configure certain network parameters on the product You can configure these parameters from the installation software the product control panel the embedded Web server or management software such as HP Web Jetadmin For more information about supported networks and network configuration tools see the HP Jetdirect Print Servers Administrator s Guide The guide comes with printers in which an HP Jetdirect print server is installed Similar to a common language that people use to communicate with each other TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network Internet Protocol IP When information is sent across the network the data is broken down into small packets Each packet is sent indep
276. sity on a printed page and higher values represent darker midtones on a printed page 5 to 5 Default is 0 Shadows Cyan Density Magenta Adjust the darkness or lightness of shadows on a Density Yellow Density Black Density 5 to 5 Default is 0 printed page Lower values represent lighter shadows on a printed page and higher values represent darker shadows on a printed page Restore Color Values Sets all the density values back to the factory default settings Set Registration Test Page Print Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and from left to right You can also align the image on the front with the image printed on the back Print a test page for setting the registration Source All trays Tray X contents choose a tray Select the source input tray for printing the Set Registration page Adjust Tray X Shift from 20 to 20 along the X or Y axes 0 is the default X1 Shift X2 Shift Y Shift Perform the alignment procedure for each tray When it creates an image the device scans across the page from side to side as the sheet feeds from top to bottom into the device The scan direction is referred to as X X1 is the scan direction for the first side of a 2 sided page X2 is the scan direction for the second side of a 2 sided page The feed direction is referred to as Y Print Modes Paper Type Configure
277. special software is installed or configured but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer To gain access to the embedded Web server type the IP address for the device in the address line of the browser To find the IP address print a configuration page For more information about printing a configuration page see Information pages on page 178 For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server see Embedded Web server on page 183 HP Easy Printer Care ENWW HP Easy Printer Care software is a program that you can use for the following tasks e X Check the product status e X Check the supplies status and use HP SureSupply to shop online for supplies e Setup alerts e X View product usage reports e X View product documentation e Gain access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools e Use HP Proactive Support to routinely scan your printing system and to prevent potential problems HP Proactive Support can update software firmware and HP printer drivers You can view HP Easy Printer Care software when the product is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network Supported utilities for Windows 69 Supported operating systems e Microsoft Windows 2000 e Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 Home and Professional editions e Microsoft Windows Server 2003 e Microsoft Windows Vista Supported browsers e Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 or 7
278. specifications Table C 5 Sound power and pressure level HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series Sound power level Declared per ISO 9296 Printing Lwag 6 9 Bels A 69 dB A Copying Lwag 7 3 Bels A 73 dB A Ready Lwag 5 8 Bels A 58 dB A Sound pressure level Declared per ISO 9296 Printing Loam 03 dB A Copying Lpam 57 dB A Ready Lpam 40 dB A 1 Values subject to change See www hp com support cljcm6030mfp or www hp com support clicm6040mfp for current information Configuration tested HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series Base model simplex copying from ADF with A4 paper size 296 Appendix C Product specifications ENWW Environmental specifications Environmental condition Recommended Allowed Storage standby Temperature product and 17 to 25 C 62 6 to 77 F 10 to 30 C 50 to 86 F 0 to 35 C 32 to 95 F print cartridge Relative humidity 30 to 70 relative humidity 10 to 80 RH 5 to 95 RH Altitude N A 0 meters 0 feet to 2500 N A meters 8000 feet ENWW Environmental specifications 297 298 Appendix C Product specifications ENWW D Regulatory information ENWW Compliance with FCC regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when th
279. stack firmly in place without bending it The paper is binding or sticking together Remove the paper flex it rotate it 180 or flip it over Reload the paper into the input tray When printing on lightweight paper or on jobs with heavy toner coverage paper is wrapping on the fuser causing Fuser Delay Jam or Fuser Wrap Jam messages Set the LIGHT MEDIA optimize mode on the Print Quality menu to ON The paper is removed before it settles into the output bin Reset the product Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it During two sided printing you removed the paper before the second side of the document was printed Reset the product and print the document again Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it The paper is in poor condition Replace the paper The internal tray rollers are not picking up the paper If the paper is heavier than 220 g m 58 Ib it might not be picked from the tray The rollers are worn Replace the rollers The paper has rough or jagged edges Replace the paper The paper is perforated or embossed Perforated or embossed paper does not separate easily Feed single sheets from Tray 1 Device supply items have reached the end of their useful life Check the product control panel for messages prompting you to replace supplies or print a supplies status page to verify the remaining li
280. t 191 collating copies 159 color adjusting 146 advanced use 151 CMYK ink set emulation 151 edge control 146 four color printing 151 halftone options 146 HP ImageREt 4800 151 manage 145 match 149 neutral grays 147 Pantone matching 150 print color samples 149 print in grayscale 147 printed vs monitor 149 restrict use 147 sample book matching 149 sRGB 151 using 145 color options 143 Color tab settings 80 colored text printas black 144 configuration page Information menu 18 Macintosh 76 printing 178 configurations models 2 configure trays 114 connect product 84 connectivity network utilities 94 USB 84 connectivity features 5 contracts maintenance 291 control panel Administration menu 17 buttons 14 clean touchscreen 212 copy screen 154 e mail screen 166 312 Index E mail Setup menu 41 Fax Setup menu 38 help 16 Home screen 15 Information menu 18 Initial Setup menu 31 layout 14 lights 14 locating 8 locking menus 190 Management menu 29 messages types of 226 Resets menu 59 Send Setup menu 41 Service menu 60 settings 66 74 Time Scheduling menu 27 touchscreen buttons 16 controlling print jobs 115 copies number of Windows 144 Copitrak devices 188 copy cancel 162 control panel navigation 154 copy screen 154 from document feeder 154 from glass 154 Job Mode 161 multiple originals 161 photos and books 160 setoptions 154 settings 155 two sided documents 156 copying books 160 collating 159 featu
281. t print cartridge in its original bag and box 2 Place the shipping label on the front of the box Shipping For all HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns give the package to UPS during your next delivery or pickup or take it to an authorized UPS drop off center For the location of your local UPS drop off center call 1 800 PICKUPS or visit www ups com If you are returning via USPS label give the package to a U S Postal Service carrier or drop off at a U S Postal Service Office For more information or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns visit www hp com recycle or call 1 800 340 2445 Requested UPS pickup will be charged normal pickup rates Information subject to change without notice Non U S returns To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program just follow the simple directions in the recycling guide found inside the packaging of your new product supply item or visit www hp com recycle Select your country region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet printing supplies Paper This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281 2002 Material restrictions This HP product contains a battery that may require special handling at end of life The battery contained in this product includes 304 App
282. t recent test was initiated or completed Packets Received Shows the number of packets 0 65535 received from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed Percent Lost Shows the percent of ping test packets that were sent with no response from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed RTT Min RTT Max Shows the minimum detected roundtrip time RTT from 0 to 4096 milliseconds for packet transmission and response Shows the maximum detected roundtrip time RTT from 0 to 4096 milliseconds for packet transmission and response RTT Average Shows the average round trip time RTT from 0 to 4096 milliseconds for packet transmission and response Ping In Progress Shows whether a ping test is in progress Yes indicates a test in progress and No indicates that a test completed or was not run Refresh When viewing the ping test results this item updates the ping test data with current results Select Yes to update the data or No to maintain the existing data However a refresh automatically occurs when the menu times out or you manually return to the main menu Link Speed The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network The available settings depend on the device and installed print server Select one of the following link configuration settings CAUTION If you change the link setting networ
283. taple cartridge unit and insert them into the unit 7 Pullthe handle of the staple cartridge unit toward you and rotate it downward to its original position Lock it into position by pushing in the handle 210 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW 9 Close the front door of the booklet maker ENWW Replace supplies 211 Clean the product To maintain print quality clean the product thoroughly every time you replace the print cartridge and whenever print quality problems occur A WARNING Avoid touching the fusing area when cleaning the product It can be hot A CAUTION To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge do not use ammonia based cleaners on or around the product except as directed Clean the outside of the product e Clean the outside of the product if it is visibly marked e Use a soft lint free cloth dampened with water or water and a mild detergent Clean the touchscreen Clean the touchscreen whenever it is necessary to remove fingerprints or dust Wipe the touchscreen gently with a clean water dampened lint free cloth A CAUTION Use water only Solvents or cleaners can damage the touchscreen Do not pour or spray water directly onto the touchscreen Clean the scanner glass e Clean the scanner glass only if dirt is visible or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality such as streaking e
284. tation setting Windows 142 outdoor signs printing 137 output bins accessories 117 capacities 5 locating 8 selecting 117 selecting Windows 142 standard 117 output quality troubleshooting 264 P page order changing 144 Index 315 pages blank 272 not printing 272 printing slowly 272 pages per minute 4 pages per sheet Windows 142 paper covers using different paper 141 custom size selecting 141 custom size Macintosh settings 77 first and last pages using different paper 141 first page 77 load 103 pages per sheet 78 selecting 116 source 115 stapler support 126 supported sizes 97 type 100 116 type and size 116 type selecting 141 paper jams ADF 252 parallel port locating 10 part numbers accessories 281 image drums 281 memory 282 print cartridges 281 parts order 281 pausing a print request 140 PCL drivers universal 64 personal jobs 131 phone line connecting fax accessory 174 photos copying 160 improving print quality 141 loading 167 printing 135 removing redeye 141 physical specifications 293 PINs personal jobs 131 316 Index portrait orientation setting Windows 142 ports included 5 locating 10 troubleshooting Macintosh 277 PostScript Printer Description PPD files included 75 power specifications 295 troubleshooting 224 power switch locating 8 PPDs included 75 pre printed paper load 108 pre punched paper load 108 presets Macintosh 77 print cartridge managing 193 print
285. ted on thick 10 mm 0 6 in heavy glossy facing down Glossy Range Maximum stack height Light glossy glossy or Side to be printed on 10 mm 0 6 in heavy glossy facing down 75 g m 20 Ib bond to 220 g m 58 Ib bond Photo media 60 g m 16 Ib bond to Maximum stack height Side to be printed on 220 g m 58 Ib bond 10 mm 0 6 in facing down Cut sheet paper 60 g m 16 Ib bond to 220 g m 58 Ib bond Maximum stack height 10 mm 0 6 in Side to be printed on facing down Tough paper 60 g m 16 Ib bond to 220 g m 58 Ib bond Maximum stack height 10 mm 0 6 in Side to be printed on facing down Table 7 5 Trays 2 3 4 and 5 paper information Type Specifications Quantity Settings Paper orientation Paper and cardstock standard sizes Range 60 g m 16 Ib bond to 220 g m 58 Ib bond 500 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond Plain or unspecified Load preprinted or prepunched paper facing up with the top toward the back of the tray or toward the right hand side of the tray Labels Maximum 0 13 mm Maximum stack height Labels Side to be printed on 0 005 in thick 54 mm 2 1 in facing up Transparencies Minimum 0 13 mm Maximum stack height Transparencies Side to be printed on 0 005 in thick 54 mm 2 1 in facing up Heavy 0 13 mm 0 005 in thick Maximum stack height Light glossy glossy or Side to be printed on 54 mm 2 1 in heavy glossy facing u
286. termine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones e X View and change tray configurations e X View and change the product control panel menu configuration e X View and print internal pages e X Receive notification of product and supplies events e View and change network configuration To use the embedded Web server you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 01 or later or Netscape 6 2 or later for Windows Mac OS and Linux Netscape only Netscape Navigator 4 7 is required for HP UX 10 and HP UX 11 The embedded Web server works when the product is connected to an IP based network The embedded Web server does not support IPX based product connections You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server When the product is connected to the network the embedded Web server is automatically available NOTE For complete information about using the embedded Web server see the Embedded Web Server User Guide which is on the product Administrator CD Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection ENWW 1 na supported Web browser on your computer type the device IP address or host name in the address URL field To find the IP address or host name print a configuration page See Information pages on page 178 amp NOTE After you open the URL you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future 2 The embedded Web server has four tabs that contai
287. the fuser fuser kit 148 mm Fusing roller in the fuser fuser kit To identify if the image drum is the problem insert an image drum from another HP Color LaserJet CM6040 series if one is available before ordering a new image drum If the defect repeats at 94 0 mm 3 75 inch intervals try replacing the image drum before replacing the fuser Print quality problems associated with the environment If the product is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions verify that the printing environment is within specifications See Environmental specifications on page 297 Several optimization modes can also help with environmental conditions See Use manual print modes on page 270 Print quality problems associated with jams e Make sure that all paper is cleared from the paper path e Ifthe product recently jammed print two to three pages to clean the product e The paper does not pass through the fuser causing image defects to appear on subsequent documents Print two to three pages to clean the product Optimize and improve image quality The following procedures can be used to solve most image quality problems If following the procedures does not improve print quality go to www hp com go cljcm6030mfp software or www hp com go cljcm6040mfp software Use supported paper Using unsupported paper or other media in the product can cause a wide variety of image quality problems Calibrate the product Calibration is
288. the keyboard Type the name of the folder on the touch screen keyboard Select Job Name from the drop down menu Type the job name on the touch screen keyboard If itis a private job select PIN to print Enter the PIN in the popup box Touch OK After all the options are set touch Start to scan the document and save the file For information about printing the job see Print a stored job on page 133 Print a stored job At the control panel you can print a job that is stored on the device hard disk 1 2 3 4 5 6 T From the Home screen touch Job Storage Touch the Retrieve tab Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to print Touch Retrieve Stored Job to print the document Select the number of copies on the numeric keypad to change the number of copies to print Touch Retrieve Stored Job to print the document If the file has lock symbol A next to it the job is a private job and requires a PIN See Use the personal job feature on page 131 Delete a stored job ENWW Jobs stored on the device hard disk can be deleted at the control panel T 2 3 4 From the Home screen touch Job Storage Touch the Retrieve tab Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to delete Job storage features for print jobs 133 5 Touch Delete
289. the name and e mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the device Language Allows you to determine the language in which to display the embedded Web server information Date amp Time Allows time synchronization with a network time server Wake Time Allows you to set or edit a wake time for the device 184 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Tab or section Options NOTE The Settings tab can be password protected If this device is on a network always consult with the system administrator before changing settings on this tab Digital Sending tab Use the pages on the Digital Sending tab to configure the digital sending features NOTE Ifthe product is configured to use the optional HP Digital Sending Software the options on these tabs are not available Instead all digital sending configuration is performed by using the HP Digital Sending Software e General Set up contact information for the system administrator e Sendto E mail Configure the e mail settings for digital sending You can specify the SMTP server the default From address and the default subject You can also set the maximum file size that is allowed for attachments e E mail Address Book The E mail Address Book page enables you to add e mail addresses into the product one at a time and to edit e mail addresses that have already been saved in the product You can also use the Import Export tab to load a
290. ting started guide for instructions The Postscript Printer Description PPD file is corrupt Delete the PPD file from the following hard drive folder Library Printers PPDs Contents Resources lang lproj Where lang is the two letter language code for the language that you are using Reinstall the software See the getting started guide for instructions The product name IP address or Rendezvous Bonjour host name does not appear in the product list in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility Cause Solution The product might not be ready Make sure that the cables are connected correctly the product is on and the ready light is on If you are connecting through a USB or Ethernet hub try connecting directly to the computer or use a different port The wrong connection type might be selected Make sure that USB IP Printing or Rendezvous Bonjour is selected depending on the type of connection that exists between the product and the computer The wrong product name IP address or Rendezvous Bonjour host name is being used Print a configuration page in order to check the product name IP address or Rendezvous host name Verify that the name IP address or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the product name IP address or Rendezvous host name in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality Replace the i
291. tion menu e Default Job Options menu e Time Scheduling menu e Management menu e Initial Setup menu e Device Behavior menu e Print Quality menu e Troubleshooting menu e Resets menu e Service menu ENWW 13 Use the control panel The control panel has a VGA touchscreen that provides access to all device functions Use the buttons and numeric keypad to control jobs and the device status The LEDs indicate overall device status Control panel layout The control panel includes a touchscreen graphical display job control buttons a numeric keypad and three light emitting diode LED status lights z c 000 G LJ 60 o U O00 bo OO cO Touchscreen graphical display Use the touchscreen to open and set up all device functions Numeric keypad Allows you to type numeric values for number of copies required and other numeric values Reset button Resets the job settings to factory or user defined default values Sleep button If the device is inactive for a long period of time it automatically enters a sleep mode To place the device into sleep mode or to reactivate the device press the Sleep button Stop button Stops the active job and opens the Job Status screen Start button Begins a copy job starts digital sending or continues a job that has been interrupted Attention light The Attention light indicates that the device has a condition that requires int
292. tners program we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled properly processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from landfills Please note that the cartridge will not be returned to you Thank you for being environmentally responsible Ef NOTE Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only Please do not use this label for HP inkjet cartridges non HP cartridges refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty returns For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to www hp com recycle ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 303 Return and recycling instructions United States and Puerto Rico The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more HP LaserJet print cartridges after use Please follow the applicable instructions below Multiple returns more than one cartridge 1 Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag 2 Tape the boxes together using strapping or packaging tape The package can weigh up to 31 kg 70 Ib 3 Use a single pre paid shipping label OR 1 Use your own suitable box or request a free bulk collection box from www hp com recycle or 1 800 340 2445 holds up to 31 kg 70 Ib of HP LaserJet print cartridges 2 Use a single pre paid shipping label Single returns 1 Package the HP LaserJe
293. to check for jammed paper inside A WARNING The fuser can be hot while the product is in use Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it a Pull the two blue fuser handles forward Jf ENWW Jams 233 b Rotate the fuser release levers down to open them c Grasp the fuser handles and pull straight out to remove the fuser A CAUTION The fuser weighs 5 kg 11 Ibs Be careful not to drop it d Open the two fuser jam access doors by pushing and rotating the rear door backward and pulling and rotating the front door forward If paper is jammed inside the fuser gently pull it straight up to remove it If the paper tears remove all paper fragments A WARNING Even if the body of the fuser has cooled the rollers that are inside could still be hot Do not touch the fuser rollers until they have cooled 234 Chapter 15 Solve problems ENWW e Close both fuser jam access doors and align the fuser with the arrows on the p
294. to an organization no provision is made for more than one network being present at that location Local network administrators use subnets to partition a network into several different subnetworks Splitting a network into subnets can result in better performance and improved use of limited network address space Subnet mask The subnet mask is a mechanism used to divide a single IP network into several different subnetworks For a given network class a portion of an IP address that would normally be used to identify a node is used instead to identify a subnetwork A subnet mask is applied to each IP address to specify the portion used for subnetworks and the portion used to identify the node Gateways Gateways routers are used to connect networks together Gateways are devices that act as translators between systems that do not use the same communication protocols data formatting structures languages or architectures Gateways repackage the data packets and change the syntax to match that of the destination system When networks are divided into subnets gateways are required to connect one subnet to another Default gateway The default gateway is the IP address of the gateway or router that moves packets between networks If multiple gateways or routers exist then the default gateway is typically the address of the first or nearest gateway or router If no gateways or routers exist then the default gateway will typically assume t
295. to and touch the personal job that you want to delete Er NOTE A personal job will have a lock symbol B next to it Touch the PIN field Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN and then touch OK Touch Delete Touch Yes Job storage features for print jobs 131 Use the QuickCopy feature The QuickCopy feature prints the requested number of copies of a job and stores a copy on the device hard disk Additional copies of the job can be printed later This feature can be turned off in the printer driver The default number of different QuickCopy jobs that can be stored on the device is 32 At the control panel you can set a different default number See Navigate the Administration menu on page 17 Create a QuickCopy job A CAUTION Ifthe device needs additional space to store newer QuickCopy jobs the device deletes other stored QuickCopy jobs starting with the oldest job To permanently store a job and prevent the device from deleting it when space is needed select the Job Storage option in the driver instead of the QuickCopy option In the driver select the QuickCopy option and then type a user name and a job name When you send the job to print the device prints the number of copies that you set in the driver To print more quick copies at the device control panel see Print additional copies of a QuickCopy job on page 132 Print additional copies of a QuickCopy job This procedure describes how to print add
296. to print the pages in the same order as they are in the document or select Back to Front to print the pages in the reverse order 144 Chapter9 Print tasks ENWW 10 Use color e Manage color e Match colors e Advanced color use ENWW 145 Manage color Setting color options to Automatic typically produces the best possible print quality for the most common printing requirements However for some documents setting the color options manually can enhance the way the document appears Examples of these documents include marketing brochures that contain many images or documents that are printed on a paper type that is not listed in the printer driver Use the printer driver to adjust color settings For more information see Set color options on page 143 for Windows and Set the color options on page 80 for Macintosh Automatic or manual color adjustment The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral gray color treatment halftones and edge enhancements that are used for each element in a document amp NOTE Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing most color documents The Manual color adjustment option allows you to adjust the neutral gray color treatment halftones and edge enhancements for text graphics and photographs Manual color options You can manually adjust color options for Edge Control Halftones and Neutral Grays Edge Control The Edge Control setting determines
297. to the tray e When you specify a particular tray or media type for a print job through the printer driver or a software program and the tray is not configured to match the print job s settings The following message appears on the control panel Tray x type size To change size or type touch Modify To accept touch OK amp NOTE The prompt does not appear if you are printing from Tray 1 and Tray 1 is configured for Any Custom and Any Type NOTE f you have used other HP LaserJet product models you might be accustomed to configuring Tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode On HP Color LaserJet CM6040 Series setting Tray 1 size to Any Custom is equivalent to First mode Setting size for Tray 1 to a setting other than Any Custom is equivalent to Cassette mode Configure a tray when loading paper 1 Load paper in the tray Close the tray if you are using Tray 2 3 4 or 5 2 The tray configuration message appears 3 Touch OK to accept the detected size and type or touch Modify to choose a different paper size or type 4 Select the correct size and type and then touch OK Ef NOTE The product automatically detects most paper sizes in Trays 2 3 4 and 5 Configure a tray to match print job settings 1 In the software program specify the source tray the paper size and the paper type 2 Send the job to the product If the tray needs to be configured the Load Tray x Type Size message appears 3 Load the
298. to use the duplexer in the test On Test Page Print Print a test page to use for the test Stack Destination Bin Select from a list of Select the options that you want to use to test bins the stacker Media Size Letter Legal A4 Executive JIS 8 5 x 13 Media Type Select from alist of Select the type of media to use for the bins Finishing Paper Path Test Copies 1 Select the number of copies to include in the Finishing Paper Path Test 10 50 100 500 Duplex Off Select whether to use the duplexer in the Finishing Paper Path Test On Test Page Print Print a test page to use for the test ENWW Troubleshooting menu 55 Table 2 17 Troubleshooting menu continued Menu item Sub menu item Sub menu item Values Description Booklet Maker Media Size Letter Select the options that you want to use to test the booklet maker Legal A4 Executive JIS 8 5 x 13 Media Type Select from a list of Select the type of media to use for the bins Finishing Paper Path Test Copies 1 Select the number of copies to include in the Finishing Paper Path Test 10 50 100 500 Duplex Off Select whether to use the duplexer in the Finishing Paper Path Test On Test Page Print Print a test page to use for the test Manual Sensor Test Component Test Transfer Motors Belt Only Image Drum Motors Black Laser Scanner Cyan Laser Scanner Magenta Laser Scanner Yellow Laser Scanner Fuser Motor Fuser Pressure Release Moto
299. tray 1 Insert the printed stack face up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first in tray 1 You must print the second side from tray 1 If prompted press the appropriate control panel button to continue Set the stapling options If a finishing device that has a stapler is installed you can staple documents 1 2 3 ENWW On the File menu click Print Open the Finishing menu In the Stapling Options drop down list select the stapling option that you want to use Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 79 Store jobs You can store jobs on the product so you can print them at any time You can share stored jobs with other users or you can make them private 1 Onthe File menu click Print 2 Open the Job Storage menu 3 In the Job Storage drop down list select the type of stored job 4 For the Stored Job Private Job and Private Stored Job types of stored jobs enter a name for the stored job in the box next to Job Name Select which option to use if another stored job already has that name e Use Job Name 1 99 appends a unique number to the end of the job name e Replace Existing File overwrites the existing stored job with the new one 5 If you selected Stored Job or Private Job in step 3 type a 4 digit number in the box next to PIN To Print 0000 9999 When other people attempt to print this job the product prompts them to enter this PIN number Set the color options Use t
300. ttings 31 TCP IPv4 92 TCP IPv6 93 technical support maintenance agreements 291 online 289 temperature requirements 297 tests networks 34 time set 191 time setting 27 Time Scheduling menu control panel 27 timeout settings 31 toner density setting 76 toner cartridges See print cartridges top cover locating 8 touchscreen clean 212 Transmission Control Protocol TCP 90 tray 1 locating 8 tray 2 3 4 5 load 104 trays automatic media sensing 114 configure 114 double sided printing 79 included 2 load 103 Macintosh settings 76 select paper 115 specifications physical 293 trays status HP Easy PrinterCare 180 troubleshooting blank pages 272 checklist 224 control panel messages 227 duplexing 262 EPS files 277 gateway addresses 273 jams 228 ENWW Macintosh problems 276 menu 53 network printing 274 pages not printing 272 pages printing slowly 272 paper handling problems 258 quality 264 repeating defects 264 transparencies 260 USB cables 272 TrueType fonts included 4 two sided copying 156 two sided printing Macintosh settings 76 Windows 142 typefaces included 4 U uninstalling Macintosh software 74 universal print driver 64 UNIX software 71 upgrading firmware 218 usage page printing 178 USB configuration 84 USB connection 84 USB port troubleshooting 272 troubleshooting Macintosh 277 V validating gateway addresses 273 voltage specifications 295 Ww wake time setting 27 124
301. type your e mail address If the system administrator has configured the device to do so this field might automatically insert a default address 4 To field Touch this field to open the keyboard and then type the e mail addresses of those whom you want to receive the scanned document 5 Subject field Touch this field to open the keyboard and then type a subject title 6 More Options button Touch this button to change certain e mail settings for the current scan job 7 Scroll bar Use the scroll bar to view and set up the CC BCC Message and File Name fields Touch any of those fields to open the keyboard and add the necessary information 8 Address book buttons Touch these buttons to use the address book to populate the To CC or BCC fields For more information see Use the local address book on page 169 9 Help button Touch this button for control panel help For more information see Use the control panel on page 14 10 Error warning button This button appears only when there is an error or warning in the status line area Touch itto open a pop up screen that will help you resolve the error or warning 166 Chapter 12 Scan and send to e mail ENWW Perform basic e mail functions The product e mail feature offers the following benefits e Sends documents to multiple e mail addresses saving time and delivery costs e Delivers files in black and white or in color Files can be s
302. typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems 2 For regulatory purposes this product is assigned a Regulatory model number This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number s 3 All worldwide modular approvals for analog fax accessory obtained by Hewlett Packard under the regulatory model number BOISB 0601 02 incorporate the Multi Tech Systems MT5634SMI Socket Modem Module 4 Telecom approvals and standards appropriate for the target countries regions have been applied to this product in addition to those listed above Boise Idaho USA February 1 2008 For regulatory topics only European Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger StraRe 140 D 71034 B blingen Germany FAX 49 7031 14 3143 www hp com go certificates USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise Idaho 83707 0015 USA Phone 208 396 6000 302 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW Environmental product stewardship program Protecting the environment Hewlett Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment Ozone production This product generates no appreciable ozone gas O Power consumption Power usage drops s
303. u first opened the embedded Web server you must connect before you can visit these Web sites Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it CCC 186 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product ENWW Use HP Web Jetadmin software ENWW dms HP Web Jetadmin is a Web based software solution for remotely installing monitoring and troubleshooting network connected peripherals The intuitive browser interface simplifies cross platform management of a wide range of devices including HP and non HP devices Management is proactive allowing network administrators the ability to resolve issues before users are affected Download this free enhanced management software at www hp com go webjetadmin software To obtain plug ins to HP Web Jetadmin click plug ins and then click the download link that is next to the name of the plug in that you want The HP Web Jetadmin software can automatically notify you when new plug ins are available On the Product Update page follow the directions to automatically connect to the HP Web site If installed on a host server HP Web Jetadmin is available to any client through a supported Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 for Windows or Netscape Navigator 7 1 for Linux Browse to the HP Web Jetadmin host E NOTE Browsers must be Java enabled Browsing from an Apple PC is not supported Use HP Web Jetadmin software 187 Security features Secure the em
304. uest Extended coverage hours and extended travel beyond HP s designated service zones are available on most on site agreements for additional charges Weekly volume on site service This agreement provides scheduled weekly on site visits for organizations with many HP products This agreement is designated for sites using 25 or more workstation products including printers plotters computers and disk drives ENWW HP maintenance agreements 291 292 Appendix B Service and support ENWW ENWW Product specifications e Physical specifications e Electrical specifications e X Acoustic specifications e Environmental specifications Physical specifications Table C 1 Product dimensions Product Height Depth Width Weight HP Color LaserJet CM6030 MFP 1194 mm 47 in 635 mm 25 in 704 mm 27 7 in 140kg 308 Ib HP Color LaserJet CM6030f MFP 1194 mm 47 in 635 mm 25 in 704 mm 27 7in 145 kg 319 Ib HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP 1194 mm 47 in 635 mm 25 in 704 mm 27 7 in 140kg 308 Ib HP Color LaserJet CM6040f MFP 1194 mm 47 in 635 mm 25 in 704 mm 27 7 in 145 kg 319 Ib 1 Without print cartridge Table C 2 Product dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened Product Height Depth Width HP Color LaserJet CM6030 MFP 1524 mm 60 in 1079 5 mm 42 5 in 983 mm 38 7 in HP Color LaserJet CM6030f MFP 1524 mm 60 in 1079 5 mm 42 5 in 983 mm 38 7 in HP Color LaserJet
305. uld check for a dial tone before sending a fax Dialing Prefix Off default Use this feature to specify a prefix number that must be dialed when sending faxes from Custom the device Billing Codes Off default When billing codes are enabled a prompt appears that asks the user to enter the billing Custom code for an outgoing fax The range is between 1 and 16 digits The default is 1 digit Fax Receive Settings Rings To Answer The range varies by location The factory default is 2 rings Use this feature to specify the number of rings that must occur before the fax modem answers Ring Interval Default default Custom This setting is used to adjust for some PBX ring signals Change this setting only when directed by an HP technical support agent Ring Frequency Default default This setting should be left at the default value and only changed when directed by an HP Custom technical support agent Adjustment procedures associated with this setting are beyond the scope of this guide Ringer Volume Off Set the volume for the fax ring tone Low default High Blocked Fax Add Blocked Numbers Numbers Type the fax number to add Remove Blocked Numbers Select a fax number to remove Clear All Blocked Numbers No default Yes Use this feature to add or delete numbers from the blocked fax list The blocked fax list can contain up to 30 numbers When the device re
306. upport provider See the HP support flyer or go to www hp com go clicm6030mfp_ software or www hp com go cljom6040mfp software Understand lights on the formatter 263 Correct print quality and copy quality problems The following procedures help you define print quality problems and what to do to correct them Often print quality problems can be handled easily by making sure that the product is properly maintained using print media that meets HP specifications or running a cleaning page Example print quality problems Some print quality problems arise from use of inappropriate paper Use paper that meets HP paper specifications The surface of the paper is too rough Use paper that meets HP paper specifications The printer driver setting or paper tray setting might be incorrect Be sure that you have configured the paper tray at the product control panel and have also selected the correct driver setting for the paper that you are using The print mode might be set incorrectly or the paper might not meet recommended specifications The transparencies you are using are not designed for proper toner adhesion Use only transparencies designed for HP Color LaserJet products The moisture content of the paper is uneven too high or too low Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper Some areas of the paper reject toner Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper The letterhea
307. ver for printers that are connected to a network e Order directly through the HP Easy Printer Care software Order directly from HP You can obtain the following items directly from HP e Replacement parts To order replacement parts in the U S go to www hp com go hpparts Outside the United States order parts by contacting your local authorized HP service center e Supplies and accessories To order supplies in the U S go to www hp com go ljsupplies To order supplies and accessories worldwide go to www hp com ghp buyonline html Order through service or support providers To order a part or accessory contact an HP authorized service or support provider Order directly through the embedded Web server for printers that are connected to a network Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server 1 In the Web browser on the computer type the IP address or host name of the device The status window opens 2 Inthe Other links area double click Order Supplies This provides a URL for a site from which you can purchase consumables 3 Select the part numbers that you want to order and follow the instructions on the screen Order directly through the HP Easy Printer Care software HP Easy Printer Care software is a printer management tool designed to make printer configuration monitoring supplies ordering troubleshooting and updating as simple and efficient as possible
308. xchange color information between software programs and devices using a common definition that assures typical users will experience greatly improved color matching sRGB improves your ability to match colors between the product the computer monitor and other input devices scanner digital camera automatically without the need to become a color expert Print in four colors CMYK Cyan magenta yellow and black CMYK are the inks used by a printing press The process is often called four color printing CMYK data files are typically used by and originate from graphic arts printing and publishing environments The product will accept CMYK colors through the PS printer driver The product color rendering of CMYK is designed to provide rich saturated colors for text and graphics CMYK ink set emulation HP postscript level 3 emulation ENWW The product color rendering of CMYK can be made to emulate several standard offset press ink sets In some situations the CMYK color values in an image or document might not be suited to the product For example a document might be optimized for another product For best results the CMYK values Advanced color use 151 should be adapted to the HP Color LaserJet CM6030 or HP Color LaserJet CM6040 Select the appropriate color input profile from the printer driver Default CMYK HP CMYK technology produces optimal printing results for most printing jobs Specification for Web Offset Publicatio

Manuals - Elgiganten Företag Online

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manuals - Elgiganten F&ouml;retag Online

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manuals - Elgiganten Företag Online